Home

In This Section - Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

1. 5 7 Suspension Ropes Data Tag 5 7 Governor Rope Data Tag pre erc 2 7 Bii rrrm 5 7 PUB CLADE PE E E gt 5 7 Emergency Brake Data Plate 5 8 Speed Governor Data Plate 5 8 Counterweight Runby Data Plate 5 8 Spring Buffer Data 5 64654456 050040 X 5 8 Oil Buffer Data Plates 5 8 Machine Groove Diameter Plate 5 8 Brake Adjustment Data Plate 5 9 Ambient Air Requirements 5 8 Warning sign for Work Areas 5 9 Warning sign for Governor inside the Hoistway 5 9 Danger Low Clearance Sign 1 5 9 Locking Device 0 5 9 Preinspection Checklist 5 10 OEM Documentation Inclusions 5 13 iv Manual 42 02 EPO1 5 17 11 Section 6 Maintenance Elevator Main
2. s ey pue suonnios p lu luio ioqe AIsu dx p u y Aq 1502 59045 pin6 5 pue sepinb 19 o1 09513 e ueuuojied qel 1 JO 10 5 55 pue pa1 edsur sjusuodujo5 pl u eui ur 3ueunsnfpe esee pue seunsue 3ubrem 3461 pue uibuans Jo jeuundo Ue 10 pue n52np 5 ybiy sbunse 09513 v y uo 1 15 54015 slei y esiM1sod 5 122 BY Jo 01102 s p d qeu 009 1 541 005 2 aede S W 007 paeds 401e 9 3 ASIY YBIH 01 PIW Jo s pin J01e 9 3 JaBuassed qa ns Qq4VQNVIS 41095 S ssndsip 5 e gt eg 50126 3oNVWHOdH43d ONIGNVLSLNO 51 0006 9 OLY Aujenb 1eu1 suoneagiA pue y
3. 8 1 2 216mm ohipping WeIOPlL ses des seme thm need ae re tcd 28 Ibs 12 7 kg Mounting Bolt Holes SIGIS 11 16 x 1 1 16 17mm x 27mm Bolt Hole LocationS Refer to Mounting Template Roller Wheels CSS 15 16 24mm Neoprene Tread Width 1 2 13mm Polyurethane Tread Width 1 2 13mm deh hee dee oes 3 1 4 83mm j lD cites 0 4724 12mm Runout Total Indicator 0 002 051mm PARTS LIST 20 E 10 _ F 9 eA m gt S phe i 15 q F 2 YN S x gt lt kon 4 JH d in EN es p 21 5 Ed 3 El 18 b _ 4 2 43 x P Pe m G I i j 10 9 d Notes Top Level Assembly for Model C Roller Guide with Std Neoprene Rollers is EC18400 Top Level Assembly for Model C Roller Guide with Polyurethane Rollers is EC18445 Adjustable Stop Kits are available as an option under part no EC18412 m Parts cannot be ordered individually and must be ordered as a complete subassembly Elevator Safety Company 11403 Cronridge Drive Owings Mills Maryland 21117 2247 Tel 410 363 9020 Fax 410 363 9695 info elscoguides com www elscoguides com Options and Factory Mlodifications Avai
4. 3 24 3 _ 3 26 ee oin a a oe 0 3 26 PONS ee inp bbe gt _ _ 3 27 3 27 Hitch Plate Connections 3 28 S 3 28 Rope Wedge Sockets 1 3 29 war s a i s PR PPP P TENTI TT TI 3 30 eee ees 3 31 Popo 3 31 lt 3 31 bya ek eee 3 32 Car Governor Installation EACH CIR OR CR 3 33 Governor Components 3 33 Overspeed Governor Mounting 3 34 H W Tension Weight Installation and Safety 3 35 H W Governor Specifications and Parts List 3 36 Counterweight Governor Installation 3 39 Sri ons ewe Fx T EEES EERE EEEN E T EEEE CC RON 3 40 Er omis HERR ETENEE 3 40 Manual 42 02 EPO1 5 17 11 cee es oe gt 3 42 SafetieS
5. y PY ainsse sdjay siu 15 lt J8 04 ade u10q uo g pue pue A quiesse mans bunsnfpe qnu au jesu Z sdais yeaday syjoq u 1uBn E LAN M382S DNILSQfQV 80H yey pue A quuesse 1 1sn 2 deb 01 8 c 195 Aue 5 se Ju doid peubi e ains ag j9 pelq ay pue qny eui jJeuus e pun esodand ejeus uo uy eui y doi uo sepinb y jJe1sur 5193 DNILLIA 35440 euu e e d u JoyDeIq 1461 se 100 jesu spnis JO spjou uonisog quuesse Jo1snp Jo qnu aui e2e d 14 2 8 y uo payeas s uA quu
6. pue 3 gt ueuuoji d unundo 104 pue asiou zluulului pue suonipuoo JO 02513 1sn pe Ajisea Ja Je3sur 991 21351 zey 1 1ueunsnfpe V 02573 TEMPLATE SHOWN ACTUAL SIZE 5 1 2 V I DOIAI 140mm N e E N F Tm 4 r T 2532 2r0 Aces 9 3 4 in 248mm FROM FACE OF RAIL N m NES E co N i a ToU 2 3 4 in 70mm a ee q ec NI o gt 2 3 8 in i dod ime WWM xl 60mm i L E y lt 525 ie lt 262 5 gt asz 59 IModel A SPECIFICATIONS Size and Weight Height Overall cd ieccgcdeestgoueovdesseateeavieeeass 18 1 2 Width on 30 Ib 1 1 4 13 1 4 VOD 15 D Ral asesor rar Pup acces chores SE 12 5 8 Depth Overall 11 3 4 Shipping u tcrra trace ttm dedos ditiores rece fend 61 Ibs Mounting Bolt Holes 470mm 337mm
7. D SPECIFICATIONS Size and Weight Height Overall Width Overall Depth Overall Maximum Shipping Weight Mounting Bolt Holes Four 51018 Bolt Hole Locations ASS 7 1 2 191mm ae ot bbs oes eee eee 7 1 8 181mm ae ees 6 1 4 159mm pe hd ee ee 14 Ibs 6 4kg 11 16 x 1 1 16 17mm x 27mm Refer to Mounting Template Roller Wheels DIS CSS T 15 16 24mm Neoprene Tread Width 1 2 13mm Polyurethane Tread Width 27 13mm ce ae carted oe eee ewe See eee TES 3 1 4 83mm scu 0 4724 12mm Runout Total Indicator 0 002 051mm PARTS LIST 4 220170 1 3 aia 4 8 2 Jel a ils 2 wa a wd an oe 12 a _ Se 7 7 ts 7 M 4 exe d r 2 2 fae sl MY 4 DA A dx 1 5 Elevator Safety Company 11403 Cronridge Drive Owings Mills Maryland 21117 2247 Tel 410 363 9020 Fax 410 363 9695 info elscoguides com www elscoguides com Options and Factory Mlodifications Available Polyurethane composition roller wheels can be used to replace standard neoprene wheels in selected applications Refer to the ELSCO guide selector cha
8. 2 8 __ 2 8 PROPRE 04 60594 ae ee ed 05550 bbe eed 248 2 9 Isolation Pad Maintenance 2 10 Important Information About PMAC Machines 2 10 Machine Duty LADS EGRET CROCO 2 10 Lubrication and Maintenance 2 11 Hitch Plates Dead End 2 11 E _ GR ERR Rd P2423 2 12 SS ais gt GT 2 12 General Rules for ClipS 2 13 Bossi 2 18 1 __ 2 18 Car and Counterweight Pit Channels 2 19 Channel Hold Downs 2 19 Counterweight Rails uuuauuaded dur d XE Rd eR ODER ES 2 20 LUE PO Lou oh EXER X WATERS EUR 2 20 dee aia 2 21 Section 3 Platform and Hoistway In TUS 3 1 Sling Platform Assembly 3 2 Safety Plank Sheave Plank Assembly 3 3 Sting Platform nulo A ET
9. Buijejsur Je1unoo MAJS 1u unsn pB8 UN 1e0 j SL JUI 61 58915 gt sdo s l qe1sn pe Anpoauoo paisnipe 310N sinu ou slods m 1UOA 380 asimisod Julod yum p ddinb j gt 20 MON y JO 01 aid o1 ojqissod se ainssaid dooy eoe d ui Wol Si VW 210 2 deis saysem pue do jnun swaJos 01 JojeAojo 01 ajgesiape s sainssaid 1 Buipjou Ajainoas eui ueiuBn S dois pijos uM 1001000 1 nun epinB epis pue synuxoo uasoo alojoq sainssald jaaym Jojo pue jo sjaaym aueuram AJod oju M SI 1e0 s msod Jo ueuM MaS 1ueunsn pe 3eo j asimisod 195 o 10 71 y 54916 yeaday Bunoe epis 1snfpe iessaoau s Y J Jr xo9uoai p ds 33 18 suni e19A8s peueiun 0121 sqi 0G 01 T NNO11 3SV1423d Ajaindas sinuyoo 1uaunsn pe pue synu GZ
10. O O t c 2 P O S O lubricate MINIMUM guidelines Harsh conditions or heavy use may require more frequent service contact Motion Control Engineering at 916 463 Routinely examine If you have questions about service requirements 9200 These are routine tasks Use a different form for trouble reports or callbacks Manual 42 02 EP02 6 60 MRL Maintenance Visit Log and Call Back Forms a 2 2 D a c o e p c 9 o j D o e 2 o c o Im D lt oe D o Co E o D 5 5 o m m D r gt gt D o UBIDIUYOS 6 61 Maintenance Detailed Checklist Pit Buffers Securely fastened Vertical and aligned with strike plates Correct extended height Spring Complete Properly seated No distortion or damage Oil Check for leakage Check oil level Check switch function Compensation Securely fastened Hangers in good condition No contact with obstructions No contact with pit floor Check pull out switch if used Check anti sway if used Pit Stop Switch Pit Lighting Clean Pit Rails Securely fastened Joints aligned Clean Lubricate if appropriate Seismic Zones Check anti derailment guides Check seismic sensor
11. p NEN p NENNEN p p NEN EN NEN NEN p NEN NEN NEN p NATIONAL ELEVATOR CAB amp DOOR CORP WWW NECD COM ENTRANCE S SP ASSEMBLY FRONT VIEW HAND 5 SHOWN ow oo CHECKED BY NATIONAL JOB DRAWING INSTDWG101 2 4 15 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 000 Figure 4 12 National Side Slide Sill Detail Left Hand T lt C 5 000 DOOR OPENING WIDTH es EQUAL EQUAL eese 000 15 000 gt 1 20000 f C e K 2 A c E Y e QE e ere Qua mu 1 000 4 _ 1 000 B Logge dise FICURE 1 2 6 1 250 TYP 000 LS HI ee ER E a md ues E rb 4 q SECTION BSE Entrance Sills Sill Pre assembly 1 Insert 16 3 8 bolts Item G into the grooves under the sill as shown in Figure 4 10 Section B B Note hand of opening 2 Markthe door opening location on the sill and position the bolts along the length of the sill using the reference locations shown in Figure 4 10 sub figure 1 2 3 Place pre assembled sill on top of pocketed slab and adjust the supports so that the top of the sill is aligned with the finished floor 4 Attachthe top and bottom adjustable sill support Item
12. 01 99UM Jo le ay uo puey Aq ue sjeauM aui pue 011 91 1 O 2 1 uonne3 10 jenba ae 8 owe aye 1 Sq 06 01 Gz squesaidai siu iei SU y JO 998 y epis uo jo yaz sjaaym epis sinu Bunsnfpe 1321 y puey Aq Jajo1 eui pps eui uo 91 1 z sI en PINOYS 19j0 We opis Jo 0121 Sq 0G 01 GZ siy WV opis ensseJd 01 we epis 1snfpy pue ainssaid 398 y Jeu eg 01 9 qissod maos Bunsn pe qny abe y lt 4 4 5 j 1 1 A Z ui s SM3HOS LAN y DNIMOVHI 3905539 WHY 3015 Wav 3415 ASWIYONI 1NN 901
13. 3 43 Temporary hh 3 44 Traveler Hoistway Cables 3 45 EN 3 45 t a a eee 3 45 pound _ ___ 3 45 s Dl fs oa 4 6 oe _ _ es 3 45 ai TIE ia a EEE EA 3 46 Cable Loop When Hangindg 3 47 LI TEL ORC EE T E 3 47 ee gt sus GA Y XA 3 48 Dalon male LUE R A 3 49 Car Top Locking Bolt MRL Applications 3 50 Elevator Controller Drive and ISO Transformer 3 52 LODS go ak a he wa 3 52 Isolation Transformer if 3 52 Section 4 Entrances Car and Positioning System In this section 242 3 oo __ _ ees 4 1 Hall Entrances and 5 4 2 igs ee ee ee ae Se ee ee ee ee er ee ae eee eee ee ae Taree ee ee 4 2 Swiss Dane Entrances 4 2 EOSDEBET od ka det eb 4 4 Entrance SillS 4 6 _ ee Se ee ee ey ee ee 4 7 Finish Assembly Mid and Bottom 00 5
14. 4 9 Finish Assembly Top 4 10 ok gt gt ___ Nae 4 10 National Entrances 4 11 Xt qoe dE 4 16 Cl OS go ee ee 4 23 ee oo 4 24 Cab Shell Wall 4 24 Corner ysl u v dA C E REGE 4 26 Canopy TEM ERU A 4 27 es Ves 4 29 oe oh wh he ___ __ 4 30 Cab 4 42 Cab InteriorS 4 45 Cr a322dka eR EE 4 45 eo a ooh 4 46 Door Operator and Hatch Door 4 47 Doors and Door Hardware 4 47 Hall 4 47 Car Operating Panels PAXGURE AO PX RR XX 4 47 MRL Rescue Assist System 4 48 _ _ 6_ _ _ _ 4 49 Battery and Charger Connection 1 4 49
15. eJojoq saunssaid 1 01 pue yooyo BuneJedo suni 9xye A 1 sinu Jo pue syoq 1841 GUNS 01 seoueie9jo eAqsIou o1 peeds uono dsul 1e uonoaJip umop pue dn aui ul spew e eu sjueunsnfpe 191v 3ueuiuBi e 18 douduu puey J9 oJ aui phis 01 9 qissod jou Aew seunsseJd saybiy Asiou J0 pue e Bursneo Aq Ayjenb Jaye j sJ ape 51005 16 Buns SI y Buru 51008 18 0 9 qissod se se aunssaJd 21818 daey 01 SI sensseJd 1e 9jeJedo ued 1 eueurjeunAod 692 0121 JO Sq 0G 01 GZ uonisoduioo u do u JO payloads asou saJnssaJd Y UBUM 5 uo JO JawAjod y ale sSJ UA 9 0J aueyjaunAjod 5 020573 sjueunsnf pe Aue eJojoq uMous se uedoud peuBipe 1841 auns ag uoneunojul 10 6 4915 01 yum p ddinb 5 Ji sainssaJd 99UM ajqemoyye 10 6 deis
16. OTE BUNUNOW episul 83S p any pue usamieq e insu 01 ssaJs Jepun pajoedsur 06001 Aoujueouoo pue ss upunoi 199LIed Buipeay E30 uu 160 seuout 2007 01 puno6 uoisioaJd sJa oJ 029113 51006 e j 1 Jey sonsugjoeJeuo uBiu ae 098139 euinueD pue Ayjenb epu 01 jenuesse sonsugjoeJeuo s 29uM auaJdoau 02511 Aug 1u9js u joouis e 01 K snouoBu pue pepunoduioo eroeds JYV 3din9 q3avo1 9NIds V 10 S39VINVAGV ALITVND JHL 3H3HM SAVI HOIV A13 Q33dS MOT1 01 1H9I1 AH3A NO ATIndjss300nS 051 HI YATION g OL H3NIHVd 1H9I3MH31NnOO V SV 5 AlluVviWiHg ALITVND 9NIZIINILdO AMWONOO3 3ZIWIXVIN OL GdH33NI9N3 SVH 1 3H di1UNOM TIVIAS sainssaJd 10 6 deis 0 J9J91 eueujaunAjod UM p ddinb sopinD J 9 O0N eJnssaid JO 6422 01 ZL sq OG 01 GZ syuesaudai 8 41 01 91 01 2 1 pesseJduioo SI y nun INU Bunsn pe soe ua1uBn eunssaud J9joJ 208 1sn pe o LAN 9NILSQ f V 39V3 9IA1 S 0 101
17. 3 4 Stiles and Crosshead 4 3 5 Braces and Platform 3 6 Lin Switch Operalind oo hoe ep teen 3 8 Hoistway Switch Controller 3 8 Car Sill Apron and Flooring 3 9 BEN Leod duae 3 10 Hoisting the Sling and Platform 3 11 Counterweight lt 3 12 Counterweight Buffers 3 13 quqa para 3 13 Sje 928611 3 13 OE CERRO 3 13 Buffer Switch Adjustment 3 14 Counterweight Safeties 3 15 Counterweight Roller Guides 3 16 Rope Stretch Compensators 3 18 Counterweight Seismic Detector 3 19 serpiris rtrt 3 20 Counterweight A Ea FERREA 3 21 3 22 Buffer Switch Adjustment 3 23 Car Roller Guide Installation
18. Motion Control Engineering Inc 11380 White Rock Road Rancho Cordova CA 95742 voice 916 463 9200 fax 916 463 9201 WWW mceinc com FREEDOM MRL MB and MR Elevators MR ACPM 2 1 MR Geared 1 1 I nstallation and Maintenance Manual 42 02 01 Rev B2 2011 Copyright 9 2011 Motion Control Engineering Rights Reserved This document may not be reproduced electronically or mechanically in whole or in part without written permission from Motion Control Engineering Trademarks All trademarks or registered product names appearing in this document are the exclusive property of the respective owners Warning and Disclaimer Although every effort has been made to make this document as complete and accurate as possible Motion Control Engineering and the document authors publishers distributors and representatives have neither liability nor responsibility for any loss or damage arising from information contained in this document or from informational errors or omissions Information contained in this document shall not be deemed to constitute a commitment to provide service equipment or software by Motion Control Engineering or the document authors publishers distributors or representatives Limited Warranty NOTE THAT THERE I S NO WARRANTY ON LABOR Motion Control Engineering manufacturer warrants its products for a period of 15 months from the date of shipment from its factory to be free fr
19. Suonipuoo 101 sdjay osje 110815 pappe sJeo je1dsoy pue 29IA19S paleloosse speo puelsu1M 9 1sn esn 19410 150 SJ U A xis Buisn Aq puy sjuednooo sii 0 eouequnisip ui 51 peuBi esiul J240 916 0 epin6 y J9 oJ eu uoneoidde y pue Ayjenb LSOd H3NHOO NI SV HONS 39NVHV119 SI H3TIOH H3TIVINS V 3H3HM NOILONYLSNOD T33HM XIS 40 S39VINVAGQV Jdi JHL 3H3HM SgV9 YOLWAITA NO ASN HO OSTV SI Li 13A 30109 YATION V T3GO AI OL LH9I3MH31NROO AHL SV GAGNALNI All VIWI Hd SI SNOlIVOrTIddV HOIVA313 40 IAIM V OL ALIIIGVLINS SLI NI SI AGIND H3TIOS 2 3H U3dNfO TM puey Aq phis 01 aiqissod aq 10u 1 sainssaid 1oufiu uoneuuoju quu sse apis Jo opu fsiou Jo pue uBnoi Buisneo Ayjenb 1916 4915 0 sjaaym aueYyjainAjod 91 1 uum jin 083 10N oz pue 10 1801 101468 JOU pjnous 848 06 opu 103JJe Ajasiaape ueo 51046 Duns si
20. 5 GVO OLNI AdONVO dO NOILO3S E S 1108 8 LAN OZ v L Q31NIVd NMOHS AdONVO dO dOL nw 13315 V9 ZL SNOILOAS a Q N Q lt im 5 c o TE eli 4 28 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Transom Thetransom is installed across the top front of the cab between the canopy and the entry If the cab has front and rear openings two transom panels are provided The transom bolts to the canopy to the return front and to the wall panels as shown below The bottom ledge of the transom supports short channel lengths for door header mounting Figure 4 26 Cab Transom Transom Strike jamb Front Return Channel stock in the transom ledge to support the door operator header plate angle Your equipment may be different always follow the installation drawings 4 29 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 000 Assembly Process The following drawings and instructions are generic The actual elevator cabs delivered to your site have plan view drawings specific to your installation These instructions in the form of a series of seventeen 17 annotated drawings Figure 4 27 Typical Side Slide Door Shell Components TYPES OF HARDWARE SUPPLIED FOR CAB ASSEMBLY 1 4 20 X 3 4 NUT CAB SHELL 1 4 20 SERRATED FLANGE NUT CAB SHELL ETC 3 8 16 X 1 1 4 BOLT HANDRAIL 5 16 18 NU
21. f Qillqeinp uyBuas Jo uoneuriquioo eundo ue JO pue ejnonp uDueas ejsuel ase sBunseo 09973 epinB uo aumea piepuels e ale 50015 ajqeisnipy sexe yoeq 01 pue asimisod 004 ul sjed aui U99M 9q 160 BJ9 O 5182 BU JO Ayjenb jaye suoneJqiA pue sduinq Buneuiwija eui U99M19q 780 01 Y Moye OOL L sq 0082 Qioede5 s w 82 1 ose peeds SIY PIIN 01 M07 10 uiqeg 02513 BUNUNOW JO episul 99S pue joejuied Buunsue ssaid usAup 1enduioo e Aq 99UM pessaJd sBuueeq ow pue 2109 You ue 6000 suypuesnoui ua1 JO si Buueaq yoeg 5 J9 OJ 00514 luo 2 Jo jo sua1 pue 10 siea Jaye siy suoneoi dde ui USES AjyjeoidAy uey suonipuoo 1 JO speo pue eui 10 pepueiur spu Jeaq saijio9ds 70613 795 1u9 s Jo SJ qnu pue an
22. sjea 993 JOY 01 y pue 2 ssaid e Aq 99uM Yea pessaJd sbuueeq om pue W Z ue 60007 5 SAY JO peulupeuu si yoeq 1u jis 02573 uo gt Jo Jo sua pue Jo sjeoK Jaye U A 1291 SIU suoneoijdde UI u s 0 S13 suononasur 10 pisu 33S gt qnu pue puoq gt 5 e 0 559 35 Jepun pe12edsur 96001 A IDIU UBDUOD pue ssoupunoij p d 104 bBuipeey 101e2Ipu 210 WW SO 5942 ZOO uolsidaid 0 09513 53045 1u A 1d S2I1SH 1D2e1eUD ybiy s 22UM 09513 euinuob pue 9559 s nsuoe12ejeu eui s 22uM u do u 02573 1u is u1oouus e 0 p 1s 1 K sno106u pue papunodwod Ajjeideds suonipuo pe uejequn 104 sdjay osje 3114 35 pappe sued Jeyidsou pue pa1er osse speo Jaybiy y pueisu1iiM y BPO eui 92191 1sn sn sapinb 18u10 1s
23. gt 5 Two eyes 25 of Rated Load C 33 x There can be no gap between a securely tightened eye bolt shoulder and the surface of the tapped material or washer 2 Eye Bolt In Line Load ize inches oad pounds Foureyes 2 6 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Overhead Installations Aligning an Eye Bolt If itis necessary to rotate an eye bolt for proper alignment with the hoisting force you can place a shim of the correct thickness between the eye bolt shoulder and the tapped surface The table below lists the shim thickness required to change eye bolt rotation 90 for various eye bolt diameters Different rotation requirements can be extrapolated Table 2 1 Shimming to Rotate Eye Bolt Alignment Shim Thickness inches 5 8 0 0227 Bj 0 0250 I Hoisting Equipment Ensure that the hoist ropes tethers and hardware are sufficient to hoist the machine weight with a good margin of safety Figure 2 6 Hoisting Equipment 1 Useindividual tethers for each eye bolt or a tether assembly with centrally linked indi vidual tethers 2 Stand clear of the load 9 Lift with a steady even pull Do not jerk 2 7 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Overhead and Rails Machine Positioning Machines are mounted on machine plates which in turn are mounted on plates on the machine beams If required by the jurisdiction special flexi
24. ASTM 668 Oufia Acero fojado ASIM A27 Gado 60 30 Cabado Est ndar Galvanizado MEA 551 06 M Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0508 Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info eevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com 6 35 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Maintenance BRUGG WEDGE SOCKETS CASQUILLOS ACUNADOS BRUGG 6 36 Part Number Rope Size Overall Length Nom A Rod Length Nom B Rod Diameter D Description Numero de parte Diametro Longitud resorte Nom A Diam Ext Resorte B Nom Di metro D Descripci n PAGA38 12 5 16 3 8 in 8 0 10 0 mm 17 1 2 in 445 mm 12 19 32 in 320 mm 27 64 in 10 8 mm 3 8 12 ASSEVBLY PAGA38 18 5 16 3 8 in 8 0 10 0 mm 23 3 4 in 603 mm 18 57 64 in 480 mm 27 64 in 10 8 mm 3 8 18 ASSEVBLY PAGA38 24 5 16 3 8 8 0 10 0 mm 30 1 8 in 765 mm 25 3 16 in 640 mm 27 64 in 10 8 mm 3 8 24 ASSEVBLY PAGA12 12 7 16 1 2 in 11 0 12 7 mm 18 in 457 mm 12 19 32 in 320 mm 23 32 in 18 3 mm 1 2 12 ASSHVBLY PAGA12 18 7 16 1 2 11 0 12 7 mm 24 3 8 in 619 mm 18 57 64 in 480 mm 23 32 in 18 3 mm 1 2 18 ASSHVBLY PAGA1 2 24 7 16 1 2 11 0 12 7 mm 30 5 8 in
25. w NORM f PUSH BOTH TO RELEASE BRAKE af J RESCUE fa MN Ls k U 4 gt j BRAKE RELEASE 4 55 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 4 56 Manual 42 02 01 EN AR AC Tus es MEO UAI AWAX MeE Motion Control Engineering Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions A Kinetek Company In this section This section provides information important to elevator operation but not pertaining specifi cally to installation Car Locking Bolt Operation 5 2 gt Passenger Rescue Device 5 3 gt PMAC Machine Information 5 5 gt Acceptance Tests 5 6 gt Data Plates and Signs 5 7 gt Preinspection checklist 5 10 gt OEM Information Inclusions 5 13 gt 5 1 Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Car Locking Bolt Operation With the machine and governor located in the overhead it is necessary to provide a means to lock the car in position and inhibit machine and brake operation so that maintenance can be safely completed from the car top Refer to Car Top Locking Bolt MRL Applications on page 3 50 for mechanical information A Danger Suspension ropes must be in place when using the car locking bolt 1 Run the car to the top landing 2 Prevent access to the car by unauthorized personnel Post wa
26. 3 3 MeE ae Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Sling ih Assembly First attach the two side platform angles to each end of the safety plank Isolation pads up open face in Tighten lightly 2 Next attach front and rear platform angles to the bottoms of the side angles angles down and open face away from the safety plank Tighten lightly 3 Check square of the platform frame by measuring diagonally from corner to corner Both measurements should be the same Tighten securing bolts Figure 3 3 Platform Assembly l Side angles of isolated frame Isolation pads Safety Plank Front and rear angles of isolated frame Angle down open to outside Be sure holes for toe guard are in the cor rect door location Refer to construction drawings for F R applications 3 4 Manual 42 02 EPO1 MCE Elevator Packages Sling Platform Assembly Stiles and Crosshead 1 Placestile between platform safety plank C channels base resting on top of safety open face out 2 Bolt through safety C Channels and platform angles as shown Tighten lightly Figure 3 4 Stile Lower Attachments f gt bd ASME compliant tapered washers provided sur 3 Install diagonal braces Attach first to stile then to platform angle Tighten lightly 4 Install crosshead using ASME compliant tapered washers and hardware provided Figure 3 5 Diagonal Braces Cartop locking bo
27. Counterweight stack retention angles Counterweight safeties if required Figure 3 12 Counterweight Frame Assembly D Position restraint plates inverted for shipping View of sheave from bottom to show rope sheave guard ee A Danger Working with unroped counterweight components is extremely dangerous You must ensure that all components are safely and adequately supported during construction Sup port failure or collapse can result in extreme injury or death Contact your MCE Project Manager for weight stack count to achieve working capacity for a running platform Counterweight stack retention angles must be in place and securely fastened while operating running platform 3 12 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Counterweight Installation Counterweight Buffers Depending on clearance requirements in the pit buffers may be mounted directly on pit chan nels or on buffer stands that are mounted on the pit channels Buffer stand braces may also be provided The installation might require hydraulic oil buffers or spring buffers Refer also to Car Buffers on page 3 22 for specifications and oil information Refer to construction drawings for buffer type and installation specifics Oil Buffers Oil buffers are designed to absorb impact and reduce bounce back In addition to oil they contain a chamber filled with compressed nitrogen gas to keep the piston in its extended p
28. i ie Cod Eur 6 53 15 a i x eh ed Du gi 3 i T 2 2 U a k jl k j i 24 EE T l am ih 17 14 VE ul 4 p Bs 5 fx a 4 m u 7 Y L VM h T us CR MINNS ae o LE SIS MAWW gt P n mov _ k MN Mes t ra a met E i Vo ril en amer e e 3 D jee EXE 3 9 2 1 10 11 12 Notes Top Level Assembly for Model B Roller Guide with Std Neoprene Rollers is EB02100 Top Level Assembly for Model B Roller Guide with Polyurethane Rollers is EB02114 m Neoprene rollers are identical for rail side and face m Polyurethane rollers use different tread widths for rail side and rail face Elevator Safety Company 11403 Cronridge Drive Owings Mills Maryland 21117 2247 Tel 410 363 9020 Fax 410 363 9695 info elscoguides com www elscoguides com Options and Factory Modifications Available Polyurethane composition roller wheels can be used to replace standard neoprene wheels in selected applications Refer to the ELSCO guide selector chart or call an ELSCO guide specialist to determine proper applications See our Frequently Asked Questions FAQ for more information about the trade offs between neoprene and polyurethane wheel compositions plate kits are in stock and avai
29. 2 Nt Jam 313 NC 44 MsNecWasher 05 Standad 45 dO 1 Nut Jam 343 UNF 46 6 PWeasher Stendard 375 47 1 RolPn 188xt5 4 2 ledSe 49 1 Daata 2 50 2 Rvts DataTag Cd 61 f 1 Nut Jam 0 375 NC 66 207 02 1 Bracket UpperGudeRod 68 207 04 1 _ PivotBase Hammer Head Spring Guide 69 207 086 1 Bracket Solenoid amp TemmnalBock 80 400 09 1 Sprng HammerHeadRetum 83 90100 1597 6 _ 8 1 5 6 055 ShouderBot 86 1 516UNCJamNt CS 87 1 SMG UNCNylockNut 88 2 36x075 Roll Pin 8 2 PWnzBot02500075 O 9 10 f 024x05WhzBot 9 2 f 02x05RHMS 2 6 99 __ 424 G32 xO3 RHMS 9 4 G32 NylockNut 0 0 95 1 38BoxConnector501 DC2 9 3 3890 AngleBoxConnector801 DC2 ______ 7 1 38FexCondui 6 5 or 11 98 1 P3BHexCondut 460 0 Nec Washer Spacer 0 375 Motion Control Engineering MRL Maintenance Guide Rails Guide Rails In the normal course of service properly specified and installed guide rails should require no regular maintenance Examinations Periodically inspect the guide rails from the car top Verify that all joints are secure and aligned
30. 2 A Caution i 2 e XS Sp 3 e lt gt a GD d FIGURE 3 1 Place the head jamb 1 on top of the return jamb Item 2 and strike jamb Item 3 Assemble with 2 3 8 hardware Items G H and I on each edge as shown in Fig ure 4 13 sub figure 3 1 Make sure the frame is square and edges of head jamb are flush with outside edges of frame Head jamb should be flush at the back side of return jamb and would normally overhang 1 8 in the front if frame is not flush depending on cus tomer request Confirm opening width before tightening all bolts Prior to installing frame assembly to sill use caution handling assembled frame to avoid bending at assembly points 1 2 Carefully place assembled frame on top of pre assembled sill so that the head jamb rear flange is tucked behind the bottom of the header Thereturn jamb Item 2 and strike jamb Item 3 should also be sitting on top of the sill offset clip Item 15 as shown in Figure 4 14 sub figure 3 2 Insert 3 8 bolts Item G from the bottom of the sill offset clip Item 15 through to the bottom flange of the jambs Fasten securely with 3 8 nuts and washers Items H and I To properly locate the horizontal position of the assembled jamb first attach the head jamb Item 1 to the header Item 7 with 3 1 4 20 x 3 4 truss head machine screws Item L The header is tapped for this application 4 19
31. 778 mm 25 3 16 in 640 mm 23 32 in 18 3 mm 1 2 24 ASSAVBLY FASA 12 30 7 16 1 2 11 0 12 7 mm 36 8 in 937 mm 31 1 2 in 800 mm 23 32 18 3 mm 1 2 30 ASSHVBLY PASA 12 36 7 16 1 2 11 0 12 7 mm 43 1 4 in 1099 mm 37 51 64 960 mm 23 32 18 3 mm 1 2 36 ASSHVBLY 58 12 9 16 5 8 14 0 16 0 mm 19 3 4 in 502 mm 12 19 32 in 320 mm 23 32 in 18 3 mm 5 8 12 ASSHVBLY 58 18 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 26 1 8 in 664 mm 18 57 64 in 480 mm 23 32 in 18 3 mm 5 8 18 ASSHVBLY 58 24 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 32 3 8 in 924 mm 25 3 16 in 640 mm 23 32 in 18 3 mm 5 8 24 ASSEVBLY 58 30 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 mm 38 3 4 in 984 mm 31 1 2 in 800 mm 23 32 in 18 3 mm 5 8 30 ASSEVBLY 58 36 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 mm 45 in 1143 mm 37 51 64 960 mm 23 32 in 18 3 mm 5 8 36 ASSAVBLY PAGA34 12 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm 20 9 in 530 mm 12 19 32 in 320 mm 55 64 22 0 mm 3 4 12 ASSEVBLY PAGA34 18 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm 27 2 in 690 mm 18 57 64 in 480 mm 55 64 22 0 3 4 18 ASSEVBLY PAGA34 24 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm 33 5 in 850 mm 25 3 16 in 640 mm 55 64 22 0 mm 3 4 24 ASSEVBLY PAGA34 30 11 16 3 4 17 5 19 0 mm 39 8 in 1010 mm 31 1 2 in 800 mm 55 64 in 22 0 mm 3
32. Check counterweight sensor 6 62 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company MRL Maintenance Detailed Checklist Safeties Lubricate Check linkages Check securely fastened Check jaw clearances Car Bottom Check sheave condition Check rope condition Check sheave guards are secure and aligned Check sling condition Elgo Positioning System Check spring tension Check rail attachments Check tape aligament Check tape condition Governor Sheave Check sheave condition Check rope condition Check rope is clean and dry Check tension weight clearances Check slack rope switch ubricate pivot points Roller Guides Lubricate Check alignment and clearances Check for signs of wear Check securely fastened Check blade wheel traction 6 63 Maintenance Counterweight Frame condition and fastenings Filler retainers Clean roller guides Lubricate roller guides Check for indication of roller guide wear Check guides are secure Check blade wheel traction Check seismic sensor Check rope condition Check sheave condition Check runby within specification for job Overhead 6 64 Lighting Access Port Switch Emergency Stop Switch Disconnect Overspeed Governor e Clean Lubricate pivot points Check securely fastened Check for signs of damage or distortion Check sheave condition Ch
33. Rail Installation This section describes installing the car and counterweight rails and associated components Materials Materials needed to install car and counterweight rails are Car Pit Channel Counterweight Pit Channel Channel angles Angle to rail spacers Hardware Pit channels support the buffers and first rail lengths Figure 2 11 Buffer Channel Pit channels are pre drilled to mount buffer stands and or buffers Angle to rail Spacer Pit channel Channel angle Lower rail clips are forged clips for both car and counterweight rails Remaining rail clips are slide clips Slotted holes here allow limited DBG adjustment 2 12 Manual 42 02 1 MCE Elevator Packages Rail Installation Rail Brackets and Adjust Plates Rail Clips Figure 2 12 Rail Attaching Hardware S RV brackets 2 styles shown vertical slots on short side horizon tal slots on short side Extender plate not routinely used Bolt locator Shims Slider rail clip x Rail Shim s if needed Angle bracket Lock washer Flat washer Bolt hole locator always used Forged clips are used at the bottom of each car and counterweight rail to attach the governor rail mount if used and to attach the car locking bolt receiver All other rail clips are Slide clips The kit shown is a maximum kit with two extra angles shown to illustrate the two slot styles You will receive two an
34. T ae m NI lt s N v Cp 9 3 lt 10 SJ03e 9 3 10 BPOD Aj9Jes v 3NSV JO 2277612 uonoes ees 2 10 4 POD Ajoyes 3INSV Jo 22 722 uonoes ees I peuseny pue siooq pue Je UBI AA Jar sc SALON jueuudinb3 peyoeyy IIV pue siooq UBI AA 2 096 098 091 001 099 099 N A eo N e O N 2 oO 2 N d cO 00 e N e N OO Io e N e 8 2 92 21126 2 27 21 20 cies LL vl 69015204 086 526 6 9 208 7582 899 729 629 26 067 OSLL 066706469202 6 0970 200 866 916 11 8 829 78 2 2 269 29 9 079 995 229 627 001 61 222 7221 26 67 1170 79 01 22 0 626 986 768 198 608 992 722 189 82 9 965 295 119 89 7 0601 88 1 9721 90 2 eo LL 22 LL 08 0 82 01 766 526 6 228 Les 6877 877 907 699 22 9 28 5 867 2 0001 9971 ve LL 16701 0L 2101 226 26 168 098 1018 697 627 889 879 209 29 S 025 98 cC 21128 1110711190190 586 976 906 98 828 88
35. uonisoduioo suaidosu 10 parjioads I lt s1my201975 Jo pue syoq je yey uns aq 01 70949 sou1 paaoxe saunssaJd J9 01 Y U UA b saoueseajo 1 10 peeds uonoedsul SJO e 9 o paads Jamo uo JO p pu lul uonoaJip umop pue dn y ul uapu JawAjod v 9Jous G6 spew slu unsn pB e s O3S13 JIVO13J 3SV3HONI 9S1MX20J 9 10iNX201 25 10iNX201 INaINLSnrav 1v014 Mayas piers Or adie 1N3IW1S nrGV 1VO13 3ueunsnfpe jeuunj ou Pinoys pue A0498 y 18 195 We epis 94 sainssaJd ajqemoye JO Z deis 0 19431 sjoauw tutu0 L senssaJd 99uM JO 12 deis 01 led Jo ulonoq pue eueureunAjod peddinbe ase sepinB 8 pjnous uiui9 7 SjeauM eueujeunAod y m peddinbe do au 4104 18 pinous 99 JO YM J 1910N 99 Jo 191u99 y ui uey mou juauraunseaui 930N inss id Jo 682 01
36. ur 1ueunsn pe jo esee pue Buoj seunsue Ayjenb uBiH 1481 pue Ayyiqeunp Jo uoneurquuoo eundo ue JO pue 9 nonp u1Buans ej isue1 uBiu 02573 00L L sqi 0082 s w 82 1 092 p ds SIY PIIN 0 M07 10 uoneoidde ino ssnosip 01 Sn 20 9seajd 95 e paJopisuoo 5 610126 ue N 0206 5925 017 Ayjenb joaye Ajassaape yey pue y Buneuiwija 991 01 JED y pue 11 Buunsue ssaJd usAup Je1nduloo e Aq 99UM pessaud sBuueaq OM pue 09 009 You ue 2000 suipuesnouj uei Jo 01 si 04 Buueaq uoe3 1uoa s 0 09573 Ajuo Jo JO pue uoneJedo 10 Jaye 120 91 suoneoi dde ui 995 AyeoidAy uey suonipuoo 51010 JO speo pue 5 0 5 00573 sn 1u is Jo sie
37. 0 peddinbe s pinB 3910N LOWS puey Aq S uUA y phis 01 9 qissod IM 1 paysnipe Auedoud ueuM epis uo ainssaid jaaym jo BGZ 0121 841 09 01 SZ A eyeuuixoudde sjuasaudai siu es JO 191u99 ul sjoauM we y pue 0 91 01 128 1 pesseJduioo We epis nun sinu Bunsn pe apis enssaJd epis 1snfpy 9NISnfrav 3015 epinB 20 jenbe 1 01 398 y 1841 9g Os e1eJepoul puey Aq J9 0 phis 0 9 qissod aq IIA paysnipe Auedoud ueuM y ujeeueq Jo pue do uo Jojo y jesu siy Iy sinu Jo pue syoq Bununouu y Ajaunosg eyejduie1 01 49j91 I amp J y JO aoe BY xoeq 91 1 p91e90 51015 3401 au JO 191u89 y 129 expel pepnjoul jou euewpueu jesu spnis Jo sajoy je1ejduioo q IPPON 941 LAN 9NILSRQ f V INHV JOVI SLAN 9
38. 321mm 298mm 27 7kg FOUI SIO ccundavatendeces ou Peau 11 16 x 1 1 16 17mm x 27mm MOI LOCAUONS nce Force RR Feed Refer to Mounting Template Roller Wheels WONG KGS ig uy u dak oy 1 1 4 32mm Neoprene Tread Width face amp side arm roller wheel 1 2 13mm Polyurethane Tread Width face roller 1 2 13mm Polyurethane Tread Width side arm roller wheel 7 8 22mm Diameter 6 152mm 0 7874 20mm Runout Total Indicator 0 002 051mm PARTS LIST D LAAN 7 14 d MORAL 19 15 u 16 Y a puc k H mom end Me i d E 7 N UA 21 SW i A 18 23 Ao Po aoe 2s By t z k jp gt Lo 4 24 p VU M e 25 i 26 12 1 21 Notes Top Level Assembly for Model A Roller Guide with Std Neoprene Rollers is EA18300 Top Level Assembly for Model A Roller Guide with Polyurethane Rollers is EA18306 Parts can be ordered together as a kit under part 18331 Parts cannot be ordered individually and must be ordered as a complete subassembly Neoprene rollers are identical for rail side and face Polyurethane rollers use different tread widths for rail side rail face Elevator Safety Company 11403 Cronridge Drive Owings Mills Maryland 21117 2247 Tel 410 363 9020
39. 929 66v voc 896 276 ste 682 oov 292 c 72 889 299 629 t o 06 S 9 9 IG 91 S 67 29 CV Y 8 7 6 lt 692 vye ere 962 ozz 302 lt 89 099 22 9 7 9 265 69 S CG 10 S 827 99 7 v okt 28 2 VE 6 6 962 222 osz 929 99 669 029 205 797 97 Cv 60v 064 226 vee ore 62 6 2 092 vc ecc 702 oo _ 207 vec ree 892 ere 20 lt 682 9272 062 922 222 26 rsi 21 rri oo _ zo 09 84 99 70 20 os 97 97 cv 07 sej 9 vej ze 060 80 94 ve zz _ 99 vo zo oo ss 99 vs zs os ev ov vr cv ec oc ve ce oc Sz 9c z 9 209 289 19 S 075 er s 96v S7v Gv ese zee 2 6 162 022 Scc occ 66 9 06 8 7 207 98 07 226 90 062 ezz GZ rc 922 602 61 221 6 59 T gt LLI e ez s et amp lt c c dd and Call Back Forms 5 V Check Each Monthly Visit Excessive dust debris moisture Proper status indicator operation Fault indication Fault logs Connection security C
40. AKimtekCompay Table 5 1 Preinspection Checklist Pit Access Door Self locking and self closing Key security code for pit access door designated group 1 and shall not be part of a master key system Pit access door provided with a vision panel and door switch when applicable Pit access door meets applicable building code requirements for fire rating e Eliminate all holes recesses and gaps in hoistway enclosure and ceiling Bevel all projections setbacks or recesses greater than 4 inches 100 mm 75 to horizontal Hoistway enclosure shall be designed to meet Building Code fire rating requirements No pipes or ducts conveying gases vapors or liquids not used in connection with elevator equipment allowed in hoistway enclosure No electrical wiring raceways and cables in the hoistway not directly in connection with the operation or function of the elevator Buildings not continuously manned by authorized personnel must provide a telephone inside the elevator connected to 24 hour emergency service Buildings with elevator travel greater than 59 feet 18 m must be provided with two way communication telephone intercom readily accessible to emergency personnel within the building Permanent means of communication between the elevator car and remote machine room and or control room Permanent flooring inside the car Adequate lighting at elevator entrances where occupancy of building
41. Front Strike and Transom connect to the flanges on the front most and rear wall panels Figure 4 23 Corner and Wall Panel Example Corner to canopy flange Wall to canopy flange Wall to corner flange 4 26 Manual 42 02 EPO1 MCE Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Canopy Panels Canopy panels like the wall panels have slotted flanges that face outward allowing the panels to be bolted together using 1 4 x 20 hardware An escape hatch and a fan cutout are provided Refer to the cab drawings to determine canopy panel placement Figure 4 24 Plain Steel Canopy Panel with Escape Hatch and Fan Cutout Bolting flange to other panels Fan cutout Escape hatch This edge may be slotted to bolt the canopy to the wall pan els or it may be flanged to bolt to other canopy panels Your equipment may be different always follow the installation drawings 4 27 MeE e VV TlV13a _ TVOLLH3A LNSAWHOVLLY E S NOILLO3S 39NV 14 e e oz JNNVHO 9 1V1S3 d3d MOOT 5 1V1S3Q3d NO 1 1 91419373 Q O ITOH 9L S alid i I i q3ads Z 34201 320 I 15 s3anoNi 92 8 3dv5S3 i LN3INHOVLIV NOILOAS AdONVO u 2 E VV A D LOTS v L V X 9L S c gt o G U 5 5 3LIHM dQ31VOO
42. J9J oJ oe pun p1ewdn uesur sdois ojqeisn pe J 930N u q sdois e qeisn pe 310N 6 d 0 AnuBi peuinbau se K quiesse jo1 pea eu 1sureDe 8uuds y Buniesui Aq uonejeisul nux90 yum Bunsn pe qnu pue Buuds Kb HOME FISUE SU UUM PUIDSSS01 pepnjour you e1su Ajquesse pue jel y Ajquiesse 191 91ejduie1 01 Jajes e Beg pue Aquiesse 19 ee spms 10 uoniso Jejsnjo 99UM JO qnu 991 Quo 19xoeJq 99e 99UM JO S UAA J9J 0 1souueddn uoniso junoui y jo uoneoo Jedoud y e 9po N Aaa i jou Bun jexoeJq uonisog jsnjo 99uM JO qnu BY OJUO 1902040 0 J99UM S UA J9J OJ Y 11504 1 4110 uoneoo y jv Dun pnjout SPINE 9 941 10 y ANY NHu2S yoadsul Saale 1ueuidius JINOA u yM 1342VH8 77 2 anu ATSIASSW 0 p yoed pue 9315119 T33HM pejquiesse 02913 m Me
43. LEFT SIDE INTERIOR PANEL 72 S V IN m N SHELL PANEL 4 227275 5252 AS S BACK SIDE AAA Ke 94404604 AAA 952525 AAA AAA A ONCE INTERIOR PANELS HAVE BEEN PLACED INTERIOR PANEL 1 YOU WILL NOTICE HOLES PREDRILLED SA NASAAS FOR HANDRAIL S HANDRAILS HAVE BEEN ATTACHED DURING FABRICATION TO ONAN ENSURE ACCURATE PLACEMENT AN ATA VN MOST CASES HANDRAIL SPACERS USE 2 3 8 16 BOLT BACKING PLATES ARE PRE SA 52 WELDED ONTO BACK OF SHELL PANELS AND HAVE IS AA BEEN TAPPED FOR ACCEPTANCE OF HANDRAIL 2447 SPACERS WELDED ONTO HANDRAIL BOLT PASSES THROUGH HOLE ON SPACER SAY AND IS THEN TIGHTENED NA 55 IF HANDRAILS ARE SUPPLIED OTHERS SSC MCE WILL WELD BACKING PLATES ON BACK SIDE OF SHELL PANELS BUT NO HOLES WILL BE DRILLED gt RIGHT SIDE 4 40 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Figure 4 43 Drop Ceiling Attachment CEILING BRACKET CEILING FRAME Q LLI x o Z ATTACH CEILING BRACKETS TO INSIDE OF JF T CEILING FRAME USING 1 4 20 BOLTS AND d 4 O NUTS PROVIDED WITH CAB PACKAGE ADJUST y lou BRACKET TO THE HEIGHT CEILING IS TO DROP LLI BELOW Oloz STANDARD CEILING 15 MADE 3 SMALLER THAN lt E CLEAR INSIDE CAB DIMENSIONS FOR CEILING POSITIONING gt CLEAR INSIDE 15 MEASURED FROM INTERIOR PANEL TO I
44. Passing frame will bolt to subsill angle with side of frame approximately 3 16 away from edge of subsill angle or at daylight line Frame back should lap aluminum sill by 1 8 and nickel silver or bronze sill by 1 4 4 8 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors Finish Assembly Mid and Bottom Floors Figure 4 8 Dust Cover Angle Top Fascia Dust Cover Finish Assembly Mid and Bottom Floors Attach fascia angle to hoistway j wall Attach second angle to first 6 Flat Fascia Header extension Hanger cover Attach header extension to header angle with 3 8 x 1 bolts and nuts Attach hanger covers to header extenson with 10 32 x 1 2 screws Attach flat fascia to header extension and to sill above with Tex screws If the floors are too tall to attach flat fascia to the sill above fascia angles are provided 4 At bottom floor attach toe guard to sill using tex screws and then extension to guard Extension is then attached to pit wall Qe 1 75 f Ee GQ lt lt Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Finish Assembly Top Floor A special dust cover angle and fascia are provided for the top Figure 4 9 Dust Cover Angle Top Fascia Dust Cover Top Floor Finish Assembly Top Floor SS Top Header extension LL Header Attach Top Header extension to header angle wi
45. Spring 226 to 308 Trip 400 Spring 309 to 395 fom Trip 400 Spring 396 to 625 fpm Trip Bolt HexHead 5 NC x 1 75 Bolt HexHead 375 NC x 1 25 Bolt HexHead 375 NC x 75 Screw Full Dog Set 313 UNF x 1 5 Bolt HexHead Whiz 25 NC x 5 Bolt HexHead Whiz 25 NC x 625 Screw Half Dog Set 375 NC x 375 3 38 Manual 42 02 EP01 MeE A Kinetek Company 4 2 Screw Knurled Cup Set 375NCx 375 42 3 Nut Whiz 25NC 43 2 Nit Jam 313 NC 44 AsNecfWasher 0 5 Standard 45 1 jNt Jam 31 UN 0 46 6 Washer Standard 375 47 1 JRolPn 18x15 Cd 48 2 j ledSa 49 1 2 50 2 Rwits DataTag et 1 Nut Jam 0375 NC 64 192 0 7 JjWasher Specer 20 66 207 082 1 Bracket UpperGudeRod Cd 68 27 04 1 _ Spring Guide 60 207 086 1 Bracket Solenod amp TerminalBlock 80 400 09 1 jSprng HammerHeadRetum i Spring Trip Pin Return 88 61100 1597 6 2 86 1 5f xO5SocketHead ShoulderBot 8 1 j9f6UNCJamNt CCCs 87 1 J 9f6UNCNyokNutt 88 2 3 16x0 75 Roll Pin 8 2 WhzBot02500075 Cd 90 10 10 24x05WhizBot Cd 9 2 fO2x05RHMS 2 6 93 4 6 32 x
46. Table 8 11 2 1 3 cQ 3 Maximum Reduced Diameter in inches mm Nominal Size in inches mm 3 8 9 5 mm 7 16 11 0 1 2 12 7 mm 9 16 14 3 mm 5 8 16 0 mm 11 16 17 5 mm 3 4 19 0 mm 1 25 4 11 32 8 7 13 32 10 3 mm 15 32 11 9 mm 17 32 13 5 mm 37 64 14 7 mm 41 64 16 3 mm 45 64 17 9 mm 15 16 23 8 mm REPLACE COMPENSATION OR GOVERNOR ROPES IF DIAMETERS REGISTER LESS THAN THE NOMINAL VALUES DETAILED IN TABLE 8 12 2 1 3 CC 3 3 On any type of elevator the suspension compensation and governor ropes shall be replaced when their actual diameter is reduced below the value shown in Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 3 See Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 3 COATED HOIST ROPES ARE REQUIRED TO BE CHECKED VIA MAGNETIC FLUX TESTING AND THROUGH VISUAL EXAMINATION TO VERIFY THEY ARE FREE FROM THE PRESENCE OF BROKEN WIRES 8 11 3 4 Periodic Test Requirements Category 5 8 11 3 4 2 Coated ropes shall be required to have a magnetic flux test capable of detecting broken wires in addition to a visual examination Phone US 1 706 235 6315 e Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Suspension Rope I nformation
47. adequate and can lead to greater problems later Always inspect the groove radius at friction and deflection sheaves and if necessary re cut them Significant damage can also be created by irregular groove wear especially in double wrap drives In such installations the ropes themselves are frequently exposed to higher tensions which can reduce rope life considerably It is critical that groove shapes be checked radius gauge etc if new ropes are to be used with previously used traction sheaves oos Undercut V Groove Undercut U Groove Groove Types Undercut U and V Grooves To compensate for the loss of surface contact traction due to the use of smaller diameter sheaves groove types such as the Undercut U and V Groove designs were created Where once contact points were spread across a large arc of the sheave and rope modern groove profiles reduce the groove surface the rope contacts This creates greater groove pressures and can accelerate wire wear abrasion and lead to fatigue breakage Lay Direction Brugg recommends that only in the most special cases unguided or in wire guided counterweight elevators should one ever consider using both right and left hand lay ropes in tandem Lay direction can have a minimal impact on rope torque and on how it effects the guiding forces of standard elevator with guide rails For better efficiency and to reduce the possibility of unequal wear on ropes Brugg reco
48. y esu siy sinu Jo pue syoq y uequBn Ajainoas eyejduie1 0j JO BOR oeq G seuout OM aie 510 5 1001 Jo 49 U99 u y YLEN jou jesu spnis 10 Jo o aseq epin6 uo pojeisul useq 50016 e qeisn pe J 990N pejquiesse apint g 94 s n 3015 y UUM Burpeeooud e Peal synsai 1590 104 Y e ejeudoudde jnjaJeo y yoadsul seAuJe Ino u yM uonipuoo ul 01 pue jjnja1eo 1 04 03S 13 uoneJedo paouejeq Jeo ay pue pue peuBije Auedoud S i amp J 10 eA9J8 JEU puaulul099 Jej oJ pue eoueuuojed 104 uoneJqi pue asiou 0 pue suonipuoo Bunei do ejesuaduioo 01 s pin 098719 1sn pe jisee ueo J9j e1sul y sonsuejoeJeuo Jouedns
49. 5 MAYIS i kasa eui pue eui y 1sureBe ay ues deg Auedoud 1ueunsn pe siy y e hun se 6 S UAA 190 398 ay Jo eunssaud y aq IM 182 Jo1e 9 o ay jeu eunsse 5 siu 1sureDe p le s 1100 esodund uo eui y jo queunsn py OU INU Buipeeooud sepin8 uo g pue 1841 uea 9g 910N 19 xoeq pue Ajquiasse siueunsn pe Aue a1ojoq 9jeouqn ueeueq J0 pue do uo pue Ajquiasse masos Bunsn pe qnu y jesu 54915 yeaday syoq Jasno usemjeq def 9 v 195 quawubye se Auedoud paubye sepin6 y jesu 4 siy WW U l c an E ESQ DNILII4 L z AK J 35399 LJ INN ANY M3H2S SNIIS nr GaV mE Buds y pue s ysem Yoo eys 4015 ejqeisn pe BY uo Buniesui qnu y olul Jaysem dois pijos Ue dois pi os e 94 9291 OSJe IM queunsnfpe 19xoeJq A WU 9Je
50. COLLATERAL TO OR AFFECTING THE SALE OF THE GOODS f BRUGG WIRE ROPE S WARRANTIES OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES AND BUYER S REMEDIES SET FORTH HEREIN ARE LIMITED TO THEIR PRECISE TERMS BRUGG WIRE ROPE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY THE OBLIGATIONS AND LIA BILITIES OF SELLER AND THE REMEDIES OF BUYER SET FORTH HEREIN SHALL BE THE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH BRUGG WIRE ROPE WAR RANTIES OR ANY BREACH THEREOF Cancellation Orders may be cancelled only with written consent FROM BRUGG WIRE ROPE Ordering information All catalogued items are generally in stock and available for immediate delivery Call us for the name of your nearest distributor Brugg Wire Rope reserves the right to improve enhance or modify the features and specifications of Brugg Wire Rope products without prior notification Phone US 1 706 235 6315 e Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com MRL Maintenance For some a wire rope appears to be nothing more than a simple grouping of metal wires twisted into a bundle This
51. Check door re opening devices Check door limit and position switches 6 67 Maintenance Car Lighting COP Condition Operation ndicators Ride Check leveling accuracy Check ride quality acceleration deceleration Check position indicators Fire Operation Check recall operation Check Phase II operation 6 68 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company I ndex Numerics 0 6 9 120V AC Car Light Disconnect Switch 5 11 A Aligning an eye bolt 2 7 Ambient Air Requirements 5 8 Anchoring pit channels 2 19 Anti rotation for ropes 3 32 Anti sway devices 3 48 Apron 3 9 Apron brace 3 10 B BMS LINK 1 4 Bottom Roller Guide Car 3 24 Counterweight 3 16 Brace Rods 3 2 Brace Apron 3 10 Brake Adjustment Data Plate 5 8 Buffer channels 2 12 Buffer Dip stick 3 13 3 23 Buffer Extension 3 22 Buffer Oil 3 23 Buffer switch wiring 3 13 Buffers Application 6 47 Checks 6 44 Extended range 6 49 Heavy installations 6 47 6 49 High speed 6 49 Oil 6 44 Oil Filling 6 45 Specifications 6 46 Building Management System Interface 1 4 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company C Cab Assembly 3 12 Cab canopy 4 37 Cab components 4 30 Cab Grounding 4 42 Cab hardware examples 4 30 Cab interior panels 4 39 Cab lighting 4 38 Cab shell wall panels 4 34 Cab top equipment 4 38 Cable Loop 3 47 Cable Routing 3 52 Canopy 4 37 Capacity Plate 5 7 Car Ca
52. Fax 410 363 9695 info elscoguides com www elscoguides com Options and Factory Modifications Available Polyurethane composition roller wheels can be used to replace standard neoprene wheels in selected applications Refer to the ELSCO guide selector chart or call an ELSCO guide specialist to determine proper applications See our Frequently Asked Questions FAQ for more information about the trade offs between neoprene and polyurethane wheel compositions Cover plate kits are in stock and available for added safety and protection Seismic retainer plates are available for select rail sizes Call or e mail for more information Model A Roller Guide Key Req Part d Description 1 1 EA18354 Bracket 2 1 18327 Hub Adjustment Screw 3 1 19763 Hub Adjustment Locking Nut 4 1 EA18362 Grease Fitting 5 2 EA18379 Side Arm Spring 6 2 EA18307 Fiber Sleeve 7 2 18373 Flat Washer 8 2 EA18376 Locknut 9 6 EA18375 Wheel Stud 10 6 18388 Wheel Stud Lock Washer 11 2 EA18365 Side Arm 12 4 Rail Side Roller See Roller Wheel Options Below 13 1 18380 Hub Spring 14 2 EA18377 Side Arm Stud 15 2 EA18378 Rubber Washer 16 1 EA19727 Hub 17 4 EA19387 Side Arm Tracking Screw 18 4 EC18428 Hex Nut 19 2 EA19765 Set Screw 20 1 EA19729 Face Arm 21 2 Rail Face Roller See Rolle
53. Figure 4 18 Door Assembly and Installation continued D VE 2 gt gt 250 EE LO 2 Hang door assembly onto header track making sure gibs are inserted into groove of sill 3 Tip door forward under hoistway track pendant and install track fasteners furnished by track supplier 4 Level door and position it within 1 4 to 3 8 clearance between door bottom and sill Door height and clearances can be adjusted to the required tolerances 5 Make sure door panel is square with jambs and bottom gibs are running through sill groove without interference Then tighten hanger bolts 6 Attach sight guard to the door with 10 x 2 self drilling screws Item D to leading edge of door The sight guard should be attached 1 4 from the bottom of the door 4 22 Manual 42 02 EPO1 MCE Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Cab Assembly Materials needed to assemble the cab are Cab construction drawings and dimensions Steel wall and corner panels Steel canopy panels Transom Assembly hardware Ventilation fan nterior ceiling lighting and wall panels Reveals and base strips Handrails and hardware Figure 4 19 Standard Elevator Cab Example Cabs are stood up and assembled before shipment to ensure that they are dimensionally correct accurately fabricated and complete Cab front and transom are protected by plastic wrapping material Cutout for standard COP Swing panel retu
54. Permanent machine room lighting minimum 200 Lux at floor level Complete machine room enclosure meets building code fire separation Receptacles GFCI This also applies to receptacles in machinery spaces Means are provided to maintain temperature and humidity levels to within manufacturers specifications No pipes or ducts conveying gases vapors or liquids not used in connection with elevator Controller Machine Room Enclosure equipment in the machine room enclosure Pipes permitted for roof drain of the machine room enclosure shall be covered for condensation or leakage and shall exit the machine room at the closest point of entry When permitted pipes drains tanks or similar equipment permitted in the machine room enclosure shall not be installed directly above elevator equipment or encroach on clearance requirements e If a sump pump sub floor trough or any other electrically conductive material metal grate etc is installed in the machine room floor it shall be covered The cover shall be securely fastened in place and covered with an isolation mat to eliminate shock hazard e If a sump pump is installed in the machine room it shall have its own dedicated single supply receptacle and is not required to be Smoke sensor installed if elevator is equipped with firefighter s emergency operation and the machine room is equipped with sprinklers Clear horizontal path minimum 18 inches or
55. Spacer 22 1 2 30 Rails 14 480 14 Bolt Spring Retainer 480 15 L Switch Assembly 16 480 16 Bracket Ball Retainer Spring 17 480 18 1 Rod Linkage 18 480 19 Shim If Required 80 20 Bum 0 2 480 21 ELI MN 21 480 25 1 Governor Rod Assembly M 540 4 2 Shaft 11 thru 18 1 24 Rails 481 37 EN 22 1 2 30 Rails pos 24 540 6 1 Arm Linkage 25 540 18 2 Yoke w 1 2 Pin 1 R H 1 L H 26 540 20 P Bushing Oilite 27 400 66 2 Grip Arm 5 4 Spring Ball Retainer oo 2 Spring Safety jaw N C x 1 1 4 16 Screw Hex Socket Flat Head Cap 1 2 N C x 2 6 Screw Hex Head Cap 3 8 N C x 1 3 4 4 Screw Hex Socket Set 33 3 8 N C x 1 2 5 Hex Head Cap 34 5 16 N C x 1 2 4 Screw Socket Head Set 1 4 N C x 3 4 2 Screw Hex Head Cap 1 4 N C x 1 2 13 Screw Button Socket Head Cap 6 13 13 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Table 6 3 Parts List 480 Flexible Guide Clamp Safety PART NO PARTNO QTY DESCRIPTION 00 DESCRIPTION eee mae 4 N C x 1 2 12 Screw Screw Cap 1 4 N C x 1 2 2 5 Round Head Cap 39 3 4 N C Nut Self Locking 40 1 2 N C 2 Standard 1 R H 1 L H 4 42 3 4 4 Plain Washer Lock hi are 2 e 45 2 Seal For Ca
56. Stretch 6 15 Tensioning tool 6 32 Used on MCE elevators 6 17 VT Lube 6 32 Warranty 6 19 Wedge socket accessories 6 37 Wedge socket terminations 6 25 6 29 Wedge sockets 6 35 Weights 6 29 Rope anti rotation 3 32 Rope clips 3 30 Rope handling 3 26 3 40 Rope Lubrication 3 31 Rope Storage 3 26 Rope stretch 3 26 Rope stretch compensating blocks 3 18 Rope Stretch Compensators 3 18 Rope Tension 3 31 Rope Twisting 3 31 Ropes and Compensation 3 26 Round Traveler 3 45 S Safeties 3 41 Safety 480 assembly 6 12 480 Flexible 6 10 490 install 6 11 480 parts 6 13 540 assembly 6 8 540 install 6 6 540 parts 6 9 Linkage 6 7 6 5 Safety Adjustment 3 41 Safety and Code Compliance 1 9 Safety Data Plates 5 7 Safety slide distances 3 43 Safety tension sheave 3 35 Secure tools 1 9 Seismic sensor 1 4 Seizing 3 27 Serial Car Operation Panel Interface 1 4 Serial Hall Calls 1 4 Shackle Ground Strap 3 30 Shackles 3 28 Shipment Verification 1 2 Slide distances safeties 3 43 Speed Limit Tests 5 6 Speed Governor Data Plate 5 Spring buffer 3 13 Spring Buffer Data Plates 5 8 Stile Attachment 3 6 Stile Braces 3 6 Stiles 3 2 Storage Conditions 1 9 Strike jamb 4 36 Structure Overview 2 12 Switch Operating Cam 3 8 Switch Resets 3 40 Index 3 T Tension Weight Installation 3 35 Toe Guard 3 9 Traction Auxiliary Power Supply 1 4 Transom 4 36 Traveler and Hoistway Cables 5 2 V Verify safety
57. new tag shall be installed at each rope renewal The material and marking of the rope data tag shall conform to 2 16 3 3 except that the height of the letters and figures shall be not less than 1 5 mm 0 06 in CAREFUL ATTENTION MUST BE PAID DURING SOCKETING TO AVOID TWISTING UNTWISTING OR KINKING WIRE ROPES Section 2 20 9 7 1 Handling The Rope to be socketed shall be carefully handled to prevent twisting untwisting or kinking PRIOR TO SOCKETING NONPREFORMED ROPES MUST BE SEIZED THREE TIMES ON EACH SIDE OF THE CUT WHILE PREFORMED ROPES SHALL BE SEIZED A MINIMUM OF AT LEAST ONCE ON EITHER SIDE OF THE CUT 2 20 9 7 2 Seizing of Rope Ends The rope ends to be socketed shall be seized before cutting with seizing in accordance with the following a The seizing shall be done with annealed iron wire provided that other methods of seizing be permitted that give the same protection from loss of rope lay Where iron wire is used for seizing the length of each seizing shall not be less than the diameter of the rope b For nonpreformed rope the seizings shall be made at each side of the cut end of the rope and the second seizing shall be placed back from the first the length of the end to be turned in The third seizing shall be at a distance from the second equal to the length of the tapered portion of the socket c For preformed rope one seizing shall be made at each side of the cut in the rope
58. sse y 3sure6e ainssaid 9 IuM pue 993 quuesse 1 4SN 2 JO S uA 991 uonisod jnu 20 pue Jaysem 20 eys dois qnu eui lqe1sn pe ue nux20o Mads bunsnfpe qnu 5 eui Yasul MON qnu ay dojs pijos ay Bunu su Aq uonej easur 03 13431 sejou y JO uone o aui e Jo bunsisuo qui sse maids bunsnfpe qnu e pue aysem doas pijos e 5 e pue A quuesse 1e1snp e e pin5 Al8W3SSV MIYOS ONILSNFGY 80H _ uU3HSVM Z 4 4015 ON r AIGWASSV 9315110 133HM 13342V88 ONLLNNOW uone e1sul eui YUM Buip 2oiud 3 je peas s3 nsa1 saq J04 y YUM WILP e ejeudoudde pue 104 njo1e 1 padsul sane 3ueuudius uauM uonipuoo papied ui pe xped pue payedsul pejquuesse Ajjnjased sepin6 04 02573 uonejedo ay pue peueep pue peubije K 1edoud aq 3jl
59. 0 16 0 mm WSMEHR58 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 mm WSMENUES8 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 mm WS OOIHIN 34 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm WSMEHR34 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm WSMENUF34 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm Description Descripci n 3 8 3 8 3 8 WSSFERNUT 1 2 COMERAN 1 2 WASHER 1 2 WSSFERNUT 5 8 COMERAN 5 8 WASHER 5 8 WASHER NUT 3 4 GOTTERHN 3 4 WASHER 3 4 WASHER NUT eee Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope pbrugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com Brugg North America_Wire Rope Wire Rope 0508 6 37 Maintenance Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company BRUGG BRUGG WEDGE SOCKET ACCESSORIES ACCESORIOS DEL CASQUILLO ACUNADO WEDGE SOCKET WEDGES CUNAS PARA CASQUILLO ACUNADO Part Number Size Description Numero de parte Diametro Descripcion FASMEDCE3812 5 16 1 2 in 8 0 12 7 mm 3 8 1 2 WEDE yallow jaune amarillo FAS WEDGE 58 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 mm 5 8 WEDGE black noire negro PASGMEDCE34 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm 3 4 WEDGE red rouge rojo WEDGE SOCKET RETAINING CLIPS PRESILLAS DE RETENCI N PARA CASQUILLO ACUNADO Inn Size Di metro Part Number N mero de parte P 38 5 16
60. 1 3 to 2 3 of their normal travel then stop them Insert a force measuring device appropriate to measure 30 lbf against the stopped door Slowly release the doors so that they are now held stationary by the measuring device 4 Slowly back off on the device until the door just starts to move At this point the door and measuring forces are approximately equal and the closing force value may be read Door Closing Time Compliance If you are installing a job in a jurisdiction requiring compliance to Requirement 2 13 4 2 4 of ASME A17 1 2000 you must apply a Door Data Plate label included with operator or operator manual to the door operator or crosshead The data tags must be properly completed to show Month and year of installation Typical floor door mass Minimum code closing time resulting in average kinetic energy of less than 7 37 foot pounds at normal closing speed with typical floor door mass Minimum code closing time resulting in average kinetic energy of less than 2 50 foot pounds at reduced nudging closing speed with typical floor door mass Heavy door mass where applicable and landings affected Minimum code closing time resulting in average kinetic energy of less than 7 37 foot pounds at normal closing speed with heavy door mass Minimum code closing time resulting in average kinetic energy of less than 2 50 foot pounds at reduced nudging closing speed with heavy door mass 6 54 Ma
61. 16 to each other using the 3 8 hardware as shown in Figure 4 10 Section A A 5 The daylight on the hatch sill is 3 from the edge as shown in Figure 4 9 sub figure 1 1 Adjust the horizontal position of the sill using this reference daylight in relation to the cab daylight Tighten up all bolts 4 16 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors Figure 4 13 National Uprights and Header Assembly Detail Left Hand FIGURE 2 2 FIGURE 2 7 1 Onthe daylight side of the sill are pre tapped holes Attach the strike upright Item 4 to these holes using 2 5 16 18 x 3 4 flanged hex head bolts Item E 2 REAR UPRIGHT ASSEMBLY Set the rear upright Item 9 at the end of sill at the opposite end of daylight side The sill should be pre assembled with rear upright bracket Item 14 3 Usingthe 5 16 bolts attach the rear upright Item 9 to the rear upright bracket Item 14 as shown in Figure 4 11 sub figure 2 2 4 Assemblethe door bumper on the rear upright Item 9 using the round 1 7 8 rubber bumper Item M 5 16 18 x 2 carriage bolt Item 0 and 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 fender washer Item N The door bumper can either be assembled at the top mid or bottom section of the rear upright See Figure 4 12 sub figure 2 4 1 HEADER ASSEMBLY If desired attach track to header before installing header Refer to track manufacturer mounting instructions Carefully lift the header It
62. 18387 Set Screw 20 1 m EC18409 Face Arm 21 4 EF04131 Lock Washer Standard Roller Wheel Configuration for Typical Installations 12 6 EC18405 Standard Neoprene Roller Wheel Assembly 3 25 in 83mm Polyurethane Roller Wheel Configuration for Heavy Duty Installations 12 6 EC18441 Polyurethane Roller Wheel Assembly 3 25 in 83mm ELSCo P T E 1 653 EE i 575 VASE 242 T rop d gif E e Ej Mois a PURI e uio32 s pinBo3si ojJu 0006 6967017 ino ssnosip 01 Sn 9seajd 95 e 16 10326 M 09519 IW pue snowAuouAs s aweu 09513 ay s10 9e1 U09 0 sey pue suonnjos onisuadxoa ay Aq 104 1502 1 s ous pue 095713 eoueuuoped 9 qei aJ jo uun Ji e JO spyepueis 01 pejquiesse pue p 1o dsul sjuauoduloo eu ur queunsn pe se pue Buoj asempsey Ayjenb yH
63. 2 rope over a 20 sheave The 800 Series machine utilizes a 5 8 rope over a 25 sheave The governor utilizes a 3 8 rope over a 12 sheave Rope Shortening MCE provides extensions on the bottom of the elevator counterweight that may be removed to compensate for rope stretch after initial installation Before removing an adjustment block be certain that it will not cause minimum or maximum runbys to be violated Rope Fastenings The most common end termination method in hoist rope installation uses a wedge socket This method utilizes a specially constructed socket in which a rope is looped inside and then is secured with the appropriate wedge When used in tandem both components complete a unique internal configuration that becomes tight when a load is applied to the finished connection Care must be taken to ensure that the wedge is not reversed in the socket This could lead to reduced attachment efficiency or breakage When performed properly installation and shortening can be performed quickly and efficiently Fach Brugg wedge socket consists of the socket rod wedge 2 nuts 1 washer 1 cotter pin and 2 retaining clips Brugg Wire Rope wedge sockets are tested with 8 x19 extra high traction steel wire rope and exceed ASME 17 1 Rule 2 20 9 and all other applicable safety codes 6 17 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Maintenance Specifications Socket Cast steel ASTM A27 Grade 60 30 stre
64. 2 67 2 602 029 029 165 zo s 2 5 eer 006 28 6v LL VV l 0L v 0L 966 296 6 6 88 278 708 997 822 689 La o ELO 7 5 965 667 09 LC Y 29 9 22040704600 996 626 268 798 1 8 08 h 907 699 22 9 765 zo s 029 68 9 60v 008 6 2000 1 6 926 668 298 728 162 992 6L7 8 9 279 2 9 9 6 075 VOG 89 v 22 7 96 L201 800 226 826 706 698 768 667 597 O 7 969 099 929 e s 999 26 Ov 257 2 7 282 8701190700 126 826 706 178 228 908 077 7 07 079 99 09 699 965 205 69 66 207 890 266 996 6 106 698 228 708 2 7 077 802 97 9 ero 11 9 629 79 GI s 8 986 009 pue ieo jo 526 726 lt 68 298 228 108 077 667 607 829 9 19 9 va s 729 6v 297 Ler 007 0 6 GEE youl eoueisiq 907 epo youl Buiuedo OST OSE 006 OSL 295 ONIDGNN 39IA3d SNIN3dO 34 LNOHLIM SHOOG 24175 ACIS AWIL 9NISO TO WAWININ 116 188 298 228 662 792 722 50 97 9 979 219 789 G S 629 66 OL vv Viv c8 292 oos 798 928 808 082 292 722 269 699 179 O 989 zo s 629 OG 7v Or 8 066 292 vee 206 t18 8872 292 967 607 289 9 9 069 v9 829 eG
65. 2 71 2 83 2 95 3 07 3 18 3 30 3 42 3 54 3 65 1000 1 33 1 45 1 57 1 69 1 81 1 94 2 06 2 18 2 30 2 42 2 54 2 66 2 78 2 90 3 02 3 14 3 27 3 39 3 51 3 63 3 75 1050 1 36 1 49 1 61 1 74 1 86 1 98 2 11 2 23 2 35 2 48 2 60 2 73 2 85 2 97 3 10 3 22 3 35 3 47 3 59 3 72 3 84 1100 1 40 1 52 1 65 178 1 90 2 03 2 16 2 28 2 41 2 54 2 66 2 79 2 92 3 04 3 17 3 30 3 43 3 55 3 68 3 81 3 93 1150 1 43 1 56 1 69 1 82 1 95 2 08 2 21 2 33 2 46 2 59 2 72 2 85 2 98 3 11 3 24 3 37 3 50 3 63 3 76 3 89 4 02 700 750 800 850 950 Doors and Attached Equipment MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 2 5 LLI ge O lt lt 59 9 O x u re 2 M qz 9 6 gt gt 4 2 i CN I 2 99 TO gt S65 gt gt u 5 D G 5 o DA s No Nm LL lt lt Q C N 0 9 52 33 oe NA gt NCC ow 2 N iE c c gt D c 0 0 LL 000 o Loo 09 c 2 MRL Maintenance Doors and Door Operator Table 6 10 Center Parting Doors without Reopening Device Nudging S X26
66. 200 350 400 450 500 150 1 03 1 121 1 22 1 31 1 41 1 50 1 59 1 69 1 78 1 87 1 97 2 06 2 15 2 25 2 34 2 44 2 53 2 62 2 72 2 81 2 90 300 1 46 1 59 1 72 1 86 1 99 2 12 2 25 2 39 2 52 2 65 2 78 2 92 3 05 3 18 3 31 3 45 3 58 3 71 3 84 3 98 4 11 Door Opening Width inch 1 Code Zone Distance inch 6 58 Manual 42 02 EPO2 2 15 2 34 2 54 2 73 2 93 3 12 3 32 3 51 3 71 3 90 4 10 4 29 4 49 4 68 4 88 5 07 5 27 5 46 5 66 5 85 6 05 700 2 23 2 43 2 63 2 83 3 04 3 24 3 44 3 64 3 85 4 05 4 25 4 45 4 66 4 86 5 06 5 26 5 46 5 67 5 87 6 07 6 27 2 38 2 60 2 81 3 03 3 25 3 46 3 68 3 89 4 11 4 33 4 54 4 76 4 98 5 19 5 41 5 63 5 84 6 06 6 28 6 49 6 71 2 45 2 68 2 90 3 12 3 35 3 57 3 79 4 01 4 24 4 46 4 68 4 91 5 13 5 35 5 58 5 80 6 02 6 25 6 47 6 69 6 91 2 59 2 83 3 07 3 30 3 54 3 77 4 01 4 24 4 48 4 72 4 95 5 19 5 42 5 66 5 89 6 13 6 37 6 60 6 84 7 07 7 31 1000 2 66 2 90 3 14 3 39 3 63 3 87 4 11 4 35 4 60 4 84 5 08 5 32 5 56 5 81 6 05 6 29 6 53 6 77 7 02 7 26 7 50 550 650 800 850 950 1050 2 73 297 322 347 372 397 4 21 4 46 471 4 96 5 21 545 5 70 5 95 620 6 45 6 69 6 94 7 19 744 7 68 1100 2
67. 4 30 ASSEVBLY PAGA34 36 11 16 3 4 17 5 19 0 mm 46 1 in 1170 mm 37 51 64 in 960 mm 55 64 22 0 mm 3 4 36 ASSEVBLY Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono 1 706 235 6315 Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Brugg Wie COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS Socket Cast steel 27 Gade 60 30 stress relieved Rod Rolled or forged steel ASM 668 V dge Cast steel ASTM A27 Gade 60 30 Standard Finish Galvanized Suspension Rope Information BRUGG WEDGE SOCKET ACCESSORIES ACCESORIOS DEL CASQUILLO ACUNADO ESPECIFICACIONES DE LOS COMPONENTES Casgulllo Acero forjado 27 Gado 60 30 estr s rdevado Vira Acero Enrollado o fojado ASTM 668 Acero forjado ASIM A27 Gado 60 30 Cabado Est ndar Galvanizado WEDGE SOCKET COMPONENTS COMPONENTES DE CASQUILLO ACUNADO Part Number N mero de parte Size Di metro WS OOIHIN 38 5 16 3 8 in 8 0 10 0 mm WSMEHR38 5 16 3 8 in 8 0 10 0 mm WSMENUF38 5 16 3 8 in 8 0 10 0 mm WS COIBN 12 7 16 1 2 in 11 0 12 7 mm WSMEHRA2 71 16 1 2 in 11 0 12 7 mm WSMENUF12 7 16 1 2 in 11 0 12 7 mm WS OOIHIN 8 9 16 5 8 in 14
68. 5098 0 91 1 01 z SI nun INU Bunsn pe soe ainssaud 908 1snfpe puey Aq 1 01 phis 01 ajqissod Jou se1nssaJd saybiy epu Asiou J0 pue e Aq Ayjenb epu yoaye AjassaApe ueo 51008 4 Bumis s Jo1e 9 o 51008 18 1u9 aJd 01 e qissod se se eJnssaJd oneis daay 9 qesiApe SI 1 U A Jed 541 002 o1 dn saunssaud 9jeledo s uA Je oJ eueujeun Apod eu 01 ZL Jo 54 06 01 SZ sjaaym uonis euaJdoeu payloads sou 99UM J9J OJ Y u9uM 5 Jamo uo JO JawAjod v 3104S pJeu ae S 99UM Jo oJ eueuieunApod s 02S 13 uoneunojur LL 4335 0 sjaaym aueuyjaunAjod yum p ddinb sapin6 5 Ji epinB uo sdois e qejsnfpe 10 6 dais 1e d y ueuiuBi e 18 douduul eol Ww de pue 8 deb 91 1 6 deb y Jo 9J0N M S 195 peau aJenbs y Jo peau y pue jel ay de au JO aseaJoul 0 M9JOS 195
69. 6315 Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Manual 42 02 2 MRL Maintenance Brugg Wire Rope LLC Rouging Rouging is when a fine red iron oxide crust or powder rouge forms on a hoist rope giving it a rusty appearance Rouging is due to unique type of abrasion called fretting This occurs when surfaces bearing heavy loads rub against each other while being subjected to repetitive levels of small amplitude vibrations These low amplitude vibrations are due to the load vibrations that occur during the normal loading unloading and stop start of an elevator Heavy loads and vibrations can create pressures resulting in the working out of the vital lubrication within a rope Dry ropes create conditions for increased rope surface abrasion as evidenced by the metal particles that spontaneously oxidize in the air and appear as a red powder Rouge is somewhat different from rust Normally rusting is evidence of moisture being introduced onto a metal surface Rouging does not indicate this condition Rouging is a sign that abrasion is occurring where the rope strands contact the core or between adjacent strands Only the flaking metal fragments that are being deposited are actually rusting the rope itself isn t Field lubrication during installation and maintenance is critical to preventing rouging A failure to maintain proper
70. 79 3 04 3 30 3 55 3 81 4 06 4 31 4 57 4 82 5 07 5 33 5 58 584 6 09 6 34 660 6 85 7 10 736 761 7 87 1150 2 85 3 11 3 37 3 63 389 4 15 4 41 467 4 93 5 19 545 5 1 5 97 623 6 49 6 75 7 00 726 752 1 78 8 04 1200 2 92 3 18 3 45 3771 3 98 4 24 4 51 4 77 5 04 5 30 5 57 5 83 6 10 6 36 6 63 6 89 7 16 742 769 7 95 8 22 750 2 30 2 51 2 72 2 93 3 14 3 35 3 56 3 77 3 98 4 19 4 40 4 61 4 82 5 03 5 24 5 45 5 66 5 87 6 08 6 29 6 49 2 Combined Weight Doors and All Attached Equipment MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company c 2 5 LLI E O lt lt 5 5 oO o E x gag 5 9 o 2 O gt co qv 6 gt o 2 a CN I o 52 O gt 5 5 gg CO DA S N gt 8 02 o lt lt 8 42 p l Sd N A gt 5 re Ye E S N N 19 c c oo z DWM uj No o o b ZI SL Ww MRL Maintenance Doors and Door Operator Table 6 12 Side Slide Doors without Re Opening Nudging Device A 2 c m 2 D lt 3 c lt Z l 2
71. 9 Center Parting Doors 31 2 2 14 lt LLI lt LLI x O LL 2 lt 0 O O z cO CN LO LO LO e cO st st cO CN CN CN 0 89 0 97 1 05 1 14 1 22 1 30 1 38 1 46 1 54 1 62 1 70 1 79 1 87 1 95 2 03 2 11 2 19 2 27 2 35 243 2 52 0 42 0 46 0 50 0 54 0 57 0 61 0 65 0 69 0 73 0 77 0 80 0 84 0 88 0 92 0 96 0 99 1 03 1 07 1 11 1 15 149 0 52 0 56 0 61 0 66 0 70 0 75 0 80 0 84 0 89 0 94 0 98 1 03 1 08 1 12 1 17 1 22 1 26 1 31 1 36 1 41 1 45 200 0 60 0 65 0 70 0 76 0 81 0 87 0 92 0 97 1 03 1 08 1 14 1 19 1 24 1 30 1 35 1 41 1 46 1 51 1 57 1 62 1 68 0 84 0 92 0 99 1 07 1 15 1 22 1 30 1 38 1 45 1 53 1 61 1 68 1 76 1 84 1 91 1 99 2 07 2 14 2 22 2 30 2 37 0 73 0 80 0 86 0 93 0 99 1 06 1 13 1 19 1 26 1 33 1 39 1 46 1 52 1 59 1 66 1 72 1 79 1 86 1 92 1 99 2 05 0 79 0 86 0 93 1 00 1 07 1 14 1 22 1 29 1 36 1 43 1 50 1 57 1 65 1 72 1 79 1 86 1 93 2 00 2 08 2 15 2 22 11 12 13 4 5 6 7 8 m 14 12 9 24 75 6 7 9 50 100 150 250 0 67 0 73 0 79 0 85 0 91 0 97 1 03 1 09 1 15 1 21 1 27 1 33 1 39 1 45 1
72. 9NIHdS uonejedo Jed pue peuesj pue peufi e sles yey 9Ji 19j o1 pue eoueuuojied 104 uoneiqiA pue asiou 0 pue suonipuoo Bunejedo JO 02573 1sn pe 5 ueo Jo e1sul 9u sonsuejoeieuo Jouedns 1841 1ueunsnfpe uw p uBis p sopinD 01 2 02573 13y9Vuq 8 1 2 216mm MAXIMUM OVERALL DEPTH Y d lt cgo co E Lu 55 Noe A E 4 LL us SET c D 2 N Z lt oc 5 re ON gt i i AE i T SEI AE a 59 5 95 _ 1 BEES ni a o o lt cm oc ES E 09 52 e 19 N Ww M lt l SPECIFICATIONS Size and Weight Height Overall 13 5 8 346mm WO 8 5 8 219mm Modified on 7 1 8 181mm Depth Overall
73. A Kinetek Company Entrance Sills Refer to the drawing below Figure 4 5 Fitting Entrance Sills Sills Refer to the drawing below while following the numbered steps 1 Set sub sill level in all directions with top surface depth exactly 1 0 below finish floor height Align the hoistway edge of the sub sill so that there is 1 3 8 gap between that edge and the edge of the car sill all the way across the opening 2 3 Center the sub sill in proper alignment with the car sill 4 Clamp the sub sill in place and using the holes in the sub sill as guides drill mounting holes through the hoistway angle with 7 16 drill bit Mark the center of the sill 6 Slide 3 8 bolt heads into slot on the bottom of the sill and set it in place on the sub sill Match the center marks of sill and subsill make sure it is aligned with the front edge of the subsill as shown in the drawing then place and tighten nuts and lock washers to secure the sill in place e For supplied Aluminum Sill 1 8 Frame Sill Lap For supplied Nickel Silver or Bronze lap is 1 4 ALUMIINUM SIL e Sub Sill FINISH FLOOR m 1 3 8 Sill Angle by General Contractor LN NA NA A A N 4 6 Manual 42 02 EP01 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors Door Frames Refer to the illustration while assembling the frame Figure 4 6 Installing The Door Frame Rough Material Assembly Refer to the illustration while ass
74. HEX HEAD NUTS 3 8 WASHERS FLAT 1 4 20 X 3 4 FLANGED HEX HEAD BOLTS 1 4 20 FLANGED HEX HEAD NUTS 1 4 20 X 3 4 TRUSS HD PH MACH SCREW 1 7 8 ROUND BUMPER 5 16 X 1 1 2 FENDER WASHER 5 16 18 X 2 CARRIAGE BOLT AS REQ 412 X 1 2 PAN HEAD TAP SCREWS AS REQ 3 8 X 1 1 4 2 1 4 ANCHOR BOLTS NN 10 4 STANDARD BOXED HARDWARE NATIONAL ELEVATOR CAB amp DOOR CORP WWW NECD COM ENTRANCE S SP ENTRANCE EXPLODED VIEW LAYOUT LEFT HAND AS SHOWN CUSTOMER DRAWN BY DATE 02 22 11 NATIONAL JOB INSTDWG101 1 CHECKED BY SHEET INSTDWG101 1 OF 6 4 13 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 000 Figure 4 11 National Side Slide Assembly Left Hand 2 x e _ Q 750 DOOR LAP 3 9 e CO O _ DAYLIGHT gt 1 ber E I O 7 a 79 INSERT gt 0 ANCHOR N IN MASONRY we E O C2 O E3 Y DOOR OPENING WIDTH Q 750 TYPICAL DOOR LAP 250 STANDARD CLEARANCE 3 000 TYP DAYLIGHT 1 000 FIGURE 1 1 4 14 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors BILL MATERIAL PER ASSEMBLY r sm lt F M N ME HE L9 __ __ __ __ ss s NENNEN p ww Ss p po ss ss o p p sa S
75. Hoistway Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 4 Usingthe 1 2 11 x 2 bolts flat and lock washers provided attach the seismic plate and then the mounting bracket base to the counterweight frame 5 Tighten lightly so that position may be adjusted Adjust the seismic plate guide mount so that there is 3 16 clearance between the back of the seismic plate notch and the rail blade face The rail blade should also be centered between the sides of the notch 6 Repeat for the remaining seismic mounting plates and roller guides Refer to the Elsco instruction for remaining lubrication installation and adjustment instruc tions Rope Stretch Compensators Rope stretch compensating blocks are attached to the bottom of the counterweight strike plate Initial stretch may or may not make it logical to remove the bottom block to maintain the designed runby clearance During the first 8 weeks of operation at a minimum you should check ropes at least weekly and do what is necessary to maintain runby as the ropes continue to stretch The typical arrangement is a base block with three 2 inch adjusting blocks Figure 3 17 Rope Stretch Compensator Blocks Rope stretch compensating blocks Designed per car to provide adequate combinations to maintain designed runby clearance 3 18 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Counterweight Installation Counterweight Seismic Detector When required Freedom elevators are provi
76. MEASURE MODE taking measurements must Phone US 1 706 235 6315 e Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com be equipped with proper personal safety gear ANY FAILURE TO FOLLOW OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS VOIDS THE WARRANTY OF THIS DEVICE CM iy RN V lt V AVAS MeE Motion Control Engineering Maintenance A Kinetek Company Elevator Maintenance Documents Documents required to properly maintain an MCE elevator include MCE Controller manual Motion 4000 Controller manual Included with the controller OR iControl AC Controller manual Included with the controller Controller wiring diagrams Per specific job Included with the controller Imperial Electric Motor Data Manual for specific machine GAL SmarTragq or as shipped door operator manual TorqMax F5 Drive manual Included with the controller Additional maintenance information contained in this manual General Information page 6 2 Minimum Maintenance Schedule page 6 3 Car and Counterweight Safety information page 6 5 Suspension Rope information page 6 15 Overspeed Governor information page 6 39 Guide Rail information page 6 43 Roller Guides page 6 44 Oil Buffer information page 6
77. Mounting and wiring the cartop camera Placing the camera and hoistway signs Control connections PLC setup Controller settings Battery and Charger Connection Battery and adaptor are shipped disconnected to prevent potential damage The battery is a lead acid unit with screw terminal posts 1 Power down the system 2 Install the battery in the holder terminals facing out Typical holder shown below 3 Connectthe positive terminal first then the negative 4 Next plug the charging adaptor into the labeled 120VAC single phase 60 Hz outlet Charger Only in the controller Ideally the battery should be allowed to charge for 24 hours before use 4 49 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Wiring the Camera The camera requires four connections from the elevator controller Two 18 AWG wires for power 12 VDC and 12 VDC A twisted pair shielded is best for the video signal RG 590 or similar coax may be used 1 Loosen the two retaining screws and remove the camera and base plate from the electri cal box Be careful The camera is wired to components in the box Keyhole screw a Notch screw 2 Remove an appropriate knock out and set it up for conduit connection 3 Cutalength of conduit that will allow connection to the cartop interface box plus suffi cient length to adjust the camera position on the cartop when you are setting up the camera
78. Occ 902 61 971 291 009 8 7 vO Y 06 07 292 GV E ree 026 70 262 622 992 192 122 202 602 96 181 29 29 702 261 06 1 v8 221 21 v9 861 IV V vr sel vet sei gy G0 1 660 260 980 670 220 00 _ 88 6 2 692 092 IGz vc cec ecc vr c voc 96 98 921 291 89 ert 62 oer ici 201 oo oef 64 80 22 94 50 70 12 04 e si si vij t Z L 707 vere 1656 892 526 276 826 0 6 206 682 922 292 042 962 ecc 02 6 78 21 ssl ry 00 1876 69 966 vr 266 6 6 0 962 tec 022 892 972 122 602 6 781 22 091 271 SE ese bre ere 0 962 rsz 672 292 042 662 822 9 2 902 26 281 21 69 221 92 22 cle 102 162 082 ozz 092 672 622 822 BIZ 807 161 281 221 99 OTI VL I Lc 602 102 66 98 221 16911191 Eg 621 bet EFT 901 260 8870 _ 99 vo co o9 es 96 vs cc os ev vv cv ov ec oc ve ce sz oc 6 57 Maintenance Table 6 11 Side Slide Doors 2 84 7 84 LL 2 9 lt T O co co LO co LO LO LO st co st st st C
79. Provide finished floor marks visible from hoistway openings at all landings 17 75 bevels on all projections recesses or setbacks over 4 inches except for sides used for loading and unloading 18 Sumps and or sump pumps where permitted located within the pit may not interfere with the elevator equipment 19 Provide hoistway walls designed and constructed in accordance with the required fire rating including those places where elevator fixture boxes rail bracket fastenings or any other object requires penetrations into the hoistway walls 20 Temporary enclosures barricades and other protection for open hoistways and elevator work area during the time the elevator is being installed to meet all installation safety codes 21 Smoke detectors sensing devices and contacts wired to elevator control as required by local code A means to automatically disconnect the main line power supply to the eleva tor prior to the application of water in the elevator control closet or control room will be furnished by the electrical contractor This means shall not be self resetting 22 All telephone wiring to the control panel and installation of telephone instrument or other communication equipment in the elevator cab with all connections to the elevator in the control closet or control room 23 A hoist beam located as indicated on MCE s approved final layout drawings The hoist beam shall be capable of supporting the load requirement no
80. SUS ASTM D445 D2270 of 10 59 LUBRICATION CHARACTERISTICS The correct geometric shape of the traction sheave grooves is an important New lubricants should be compatible with the original lubricant factor for the service lifetime of a rope While the rope is in contact with the homogeneous solution It should have a good penetration capability traction sheave grooves it is constantly subject to wear as a result of friction a coefficient of friction of u 0 09 material pair steel cast iron Consequently the shape of the groove and rope diameters change as well and it must have a very good adhesion Due to traction bending and lateral forces a rope with a smaller diameter may rest in a T slightly deeper and narrower groove As the diameter of a new rope is usually within an upper tolerance range it may not settle in existing deeper and narrower traction sheave grooves We suggest that the shape of grooves be checked radius gauge etc if new BRUGG ropes are to be used with previously used traction sheaves Traction sheaves should be replaced or reconditioned should they deviate from nominal groove dimensions ROPE INSPECTION DX d e NU W BRUGG Brugg Wire Rope LLC Elevator ropes are not durable machine components They must be regularly inspected PO Box 551 by qualified personnel Inspection intervals Rome GA 30162 0551 USA should be scheduled so that potential damage Phone 706 2
81. Verify that all clips and brackets remain secure and undistorted Guide Rail Mounted Equipment 1 Verify that the car locking device receiver plate is securely in place 2 Verify that the governor mounting assembly if used is securely in place Cleaning Periodically check that guide rails are clean and free of rust 6 43 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Roller Guides Please refer to the ELSCO roller guide information included under OEM Inclusions on page 5 13 Car and Counterweight Buffers MCE uses both hydraulic and spring buffers Hydraulic buffers are used for car speeds above 200 feet per minute Buffers are generally installed on buffer stands whose height is dependent on the specific requirements of each installation Examinations Spring Buffers Every six months visually examine spring buffers to ensure they are Securely fastened in place both buffers and stands Vertical and aligned with striker plates on car and counterweight Springs are properly seated in cup or other mounting Springs are not deformed obviously weakened or damaged That buffer marking plates are in place and correctly describe the buffer Buffer springs and sleeves are matched sets Together they determine the buffer stroke and capacity Pay careful attention that springs and buffers are not mixed Hydraulic Buffers six months visually examine hydraulic buffer
82. Worn sheaves will wear ropes which can in turn accelerate sheave wear Either way long term maintenance costs will increase A quick check is to simply observe or to verify through actual measurement whether all ropes sitting in the sheave grooves are at equal height As the original equipment ages bearings wear out This causes sheaves to shift one way or the other causing the rope to enter a sheave at an angle Even if proper care is taken at installation to ensure sheave alignment this factor comes into play due to normal system wear Fleet angles will then most definitely cause the rope and the sheave to wear improperly and prematurely Research has proven that an angle of as little as 4 will reduce the life of a rope by 3396 percent This must especially be considered when one is installing ropes initially as well It is critical to be certain that ropes are properly aligned as they travel from one sheave to another Any angle at installation is an automatic deficit in rope life Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0208 Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 e info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono F U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 e info elevatorrone hrugs caom e www brugsrone com 6 32 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Brugg Wire Rope LLC COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS Socket Cast s
83. and hoistway signs later 4 Connect power wires from the traveler cable to the 12V and 12V terminals in the cam era electrical box 4 50 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages MRL Rescue Assist System 5 Connecta shielded twisted pair from the traveler cable to the two screw terminals on the BNC terminating Balun in the camera electrical box fork spade connections Because they are low voltage DC you can run the twisted pair in the same conduit as the camera power wires Power Signal pair connections connections terminals provided lo v Z E 6 Make camera power and signal connections at the controller end as shown in the wiring prints Placing the Camera and Hoistway Signs 1 Picka hoistway location for the signs that is clear and usable at all floors Bring the car level at a selected floor 9 Position a sign in the hoistway at a measured distance above the level at floor location and at a measured horizontal offset from the entrance and centered in the camera field of vision 4 Mountthe camera on the car in an appropriate location You can make tilt and rotation adjustments later using the tool you received with the camera Tilt Rotate A mounting bracket is provided for the camera junction box 5 Securethe sign in place 4 51 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 6 Viewthe sign markings on the LCD in the controller and have a technician on the cartop ad
84. are not manufactured by MCE such as drives CRTs modems printers etc are not covered under the above warranty terms MCE however extends the same warranty terms that the original manufacturer of such equipment provide with their product refer to the warranty terms for such products in their respective manual End User License Agreement This End User License Agreement Agreement grants you the right to use the software con tained in this product the Software subject to the following restrictions You may not i copy the Software except for archive purposes consistent with your standard archive procedures ii transfer the Software to a third party apart from the entire product iii modify decompile disas semble reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive the source code of the Software iv export the Software or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U S and foreign export laws and regulations and v use the Software other than in connection with operation of the product LICENSOR S SUPPLIERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY ANY EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH SUPPLIERS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGE MENT TITLE MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Important Precautions and Useful Information This preface contains information that will help you understand and safely mainta
85. be approximately 3 16 between side of rail and face of grip Also inside edge of grip should be approximately 1 4 back from face of rail Raise safety actuating lever A slowly until grips touch side of rail All four grips must engage rail at the same instant To accomplish this simultaneous engagement loosen nut C and adjust rod B Set governor pull thru at 400 pounds To insure proper operation of safety the guide rails must be clean dry and free of rust If lubrication is required a light coat of Nylub may be used After checking level of platform apply safety at leveling speed Recheck level of platform for any possible rack If car shows rack repeat Step 2 before conducting leveling test again Apply safety at contract speed and check level of platform as done in Step 5 Top of grips must be hard up against underside of top plate Any malfunctions will show up on level ing or contract speed test If the safety does not produce a slide to satisfy your specifications re adjust spring pressure as follows 1 2 3 Tighten adjusting screws D to shorten slide loosen to lengthen slide Limit adjustment of adjusting screws to 1 8 increments adjusting screws D must be equally adjusted S pacing from underside of screw head to top of locking nut for adjust ing screws D must be equal on all 3 adjusting screws It is not necessary for screw nearest to end of jaw to have pressure mum when safety is in relaxed
86. be bound by any terms Shipping Dates Fax 41 0 56 464 42 37 and conditions proposed by any buyer which are All shipping dates are approximate only No wire rope brugg com additional to or different from the terms and guarantee of any shipping date is made unless www brugg com conditions referred to herein such guarantee and its terms are specifically stated in writing Terms Prices 8 cc Full payment due within thirty 30 days Unless otherwise agreed to in writing a buyer Warranties of invoice date shall pay to Brugg Wire Rope its prices for the All goods manufactured by Brugg Wire Rope are a Conditi goods in effect on the date of shipment by Brugg warranted to be free from defects in material and 9 onditions Wire Rope Al prices are origin apart from workmanship for a period of one 1 year P As stipulated on our acknowledgments those exceptions set forth in a Brugg Wire Ropes commencing on the date of shipment to buyer and invoices Quotation Order Acknowledgment or Invoice forms BRUGG WIRE ROPE S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE 5 Prices detailed do not include sales use excise OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES UNDER THESE WAR 2 Freight and Insurance or similar taxes RANTIES ARE AND SHALL BE LIMITED TO ISSUANCE OF CREDIT FOR OR REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF 5 origin ANY GOODS OR PARTS THEREOF WHICH ARE Phone US 1 706 235 6315 e Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brug
87. be rendered inoperative or ineffective except where necessary during tests inspections maintenance repair and replacement and only after the equipment has been removed from service All safety devices must be restored to their normal operating conditions prior to return ing equipment to service Detailed Check List A detailed check list of all equipment and suggested checks is provided on page 6 62 6 2 Manual 42 02 EP02 Maintenance Minimum Maintenance Schedule Minimum Maintenance Schedule This schedule represents the minimal required maintenance for the installation Fach time you are at the site visually inspect all equipment to be certain it is operating properly and has no visible damage or wear Ensure that equipment is kept clean and lubricated if required Thisis a guideline schedule for an average installation unusual or harsh conditions like high usage dust abrasives moisture grease chemicals abnormal temperatures etc will require more frequent attention to equipment Table 6 1 Minimum Maintenance Guideline Schedule Weekly Initial Requirements Requirements for 8 weeks immediately after commissioning Check and maintain specified runby clearances per job drawings 6 18 gt Suspension Ropes Connections Check for indications of unusual wear 6 15 gt Check rope terminations and tension 6 17 gt Levelling Accuracy Check landing accuracy at all landings Doors proper do
88. can provide a cab shell only unit to accommodate independently contracted interiors Standard lighting is fluorescent or down light as agreed upon Standard floors are vinyl or car pet as agreed upon Flooring is supplied by others The finished floor thickness confirmed dur ing shop drawing generation phase is indicated on the cab construction drawings The cab sill s is pre installed for the floor thickness approved Standard fixtures are one of several traditional locking panel designs as agreed upon For MCE provided interiors complete drawings are provided Drawings provide instruction and material descriptions as well Review cab dimensions and materials shown on the cab construction drawings carefully Per job many mechanical and interior design variations may apply Figure 4 45 Cab Interior Drawing Example TRANSOM DOORS AND RETURNS WITH 4 STAINLESS STEEL FINISH CANOPY WITH SIDE POWDER COATED WHITE 9 oao oong INTERIOR SI i i AA III WOU y A V x MAIN ed AUX COP q 5 COP LLI 9 2 OPEN T 40002 1 LEO i x e N 000000 Y 2612 26
89. concluded the PLC reverts to normal running If the battery voltage falls below the preset 11 55 volt threshold the battery fault flag will be set Reset Faults Press the ESC button on the PLC to reset PLC flags Set to Normal Operation Press the 3 button on the PLC to reset it to normal opera tion ending any test in progress 1 The Power Transfer Input is a user programmable spare input to Motion 4000 controllers If the rescue unit was installed by MCE the input is factory programmed If not you should verify that the PTI input is assigned to a physical connection The PTI input is also used to transfer to and from emer gency power 4 54 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages MRL Rescue Assist System Passenger Rescue Operation A Danger This system is for emergency use by qualified elevator personnel only The rescue system will move the car regardless of the state of the door locks or safety string It unconditionally picks the brake The machine windings are shorted so the car will not run away The goal is to move the car until the horizontal bar on the rescue panel LCD screen is centered between the horizontal bars on a hoistway sign At that point the car is in the leveling zone for that floor 1 2 When rescue is complete close the doors and return the key Open the mainline disconnect for the elevator If possible determine the location of the car in the hoistway and make contact wi
90. counter weight and the roller guides on the bottom of the counterweight Please refer to Safety Adjust ment on page 3 41 for additional information A Caution If counterweight safeties are used a counterweight overspeed governor is provided Car and counterweight governors are calibrated differently BE CERTAIN that the correct gover nor is used in the correct location Governors are appropriately labeled at the factory Figure 3 14 Counterweight Safeties Counterweight buffer strike plate rope stretch adjust block mounting plate Counterweight Safeties Roller Guide mounting plate 3 15 Ane Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Counterweight Roller Guides MCE Freedom elevators use Elsco roller guides on car and counterweioht Figure 3 15 Counterweight Roller Guides Type C used with heavier coun terweights at higher speeds above 4000 pounds Type D used with lighter counterweights at lower speeds up to 4000 pounds 1 Place and support the counterweight frame directly over the counterweight buffer channel 2 Make sure it is well secured and in no danger of falling or dropping The four corners of the counterweight assembly are prepared with pre tapped roller guide mounting rail retention plates noe The Appendix section of this manual contains instruction sheets for the standard Elsco roller guides used by MCE They are
91. devices 1 9 VFD engineered cable 3 52 W Wall clips 4 39 Warning sign for Governor inside the Hoistway 5 9 Warning sign for Work Areas 5 8 Warning signs 1 9 Wedge Socket Kit 3 28 Wedge sockets 3 29 Welds to secure rail brackets 2 18 wire rope data 5 7 Work By Others 1 5 Index 4 Manual 42 02 EP01
92. dimensions Check that all embedded steel work is as specified Check pit and overhead clearances Check that control machine and drive spaces are as specified Check that proper power and disconnects are in place Check that access hatches are as specified Check that appropriate code requirements have been met Work By Others The following preparatory work is required in order to properly install the elevator equipment The oost of this work is not included in the elevator equipment quotation 1 Provide adequate on site refuse containers for the disposal of elevator packing material Should adequate containers not be provided the removal of the elevator packing mate rial shall become the responsibility of the Buyer Proper lighting in all work areas A plumb and legal hoistway to within one inch of plumb per 100 feet with no dimension smaller than shown on drawings properly framed and enclosed and including a pit of proper depth and a pit ladder for each elevator Hoistway pit and overhead dimensions to be as specified on MCE s approved final layout drawings Pit floor to support impact loads shown on drawings Pit floor to be substantially level Drains sump sump pump lights light switches and electrical outlets access doors waterproofing access walks handrails and hoistway ventilation as required Clear flat vertical or horizontal surfaces for mounting rail brackets at any location noted on MCE s approved final layout
93. drawings shall be in the same vertical plane as the clear hoistway line This includes divider beams between cars for multiple elevators in a common hoistway Adequate supports for foundations to carry the loads of all equipment including over head machine machine beams located in hoistway and guide rail brackets from pit floor to the top of the hoistway and not spanning further than allowed by the governing code authority When maximum bracket span is exceeded additional support shall be pro vided at Buyer s expense Any bracket mounting surface that is not in line with the clear hoistway dimension detailed on MCE s approved final layout drawings may need to be extended to meet the proper dimension Provide a code compliant control closet or control room with access and ventilation in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations The control closet or control room shall be maintained at a temperature between 32 F 09 C and 104 F 40 C Relative humidity not to exceed 95 non condensing Please validate that local codes do not require a tighter temperature range or higher ventilation requirements If the control location will exceed these parameters please contact your MCE representative for con trol enclosure options Provide lights light switches and electrical outlets as required 1 5 MeE Package Description amp Site Readiness Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 7 Complete three phase connections from the
94. e E e o z os J 12 5 1 CABLE P 2 75 Manual 42 02 EPO2 6 40 Overspeed Governor MRL Maintenance SHAFT DETAIL SECTION _ rrr 4 Lu 4 d a LS et r ir en c gt 6 41 Maintenance RT DESCRIPTION Mi OX Reseting Pawl Weight Pawl Weight 207 005 RS Head Resetting Hammer 0 375 Cable 6 201 007 95 201 00985 8 25 01 1 jGurd Sheave gt 9 20 02 1 0377 Cable Pin 0 75 Hammer Pivot Pin 0 50 Hammer Link Pin 0 375 Pin 0 50 Pivot 201 02365 26 201 04 6 0359 000 j 27 2 02 6 Ering Truarc 513337 v w 2 E ring Truarc x 51 z 74 Spacer Er Spring 175 to 225 Trip Spring 226 to 308 fom Trip Spring 309 to 395 fom Trip Spring 396 to 625 fpm Trip Bolt Hex Head 5 NC x 1 75 Bolt HexHead 375 NC x 1 25 Bolt HexHead 375 NC x 75 Screw Full Dog Set 313 UNF x 1 5 Bolt HexHead Whiz 25 NC x 5 Bolt HexHead Whiz 25 NC x 625 Screw Half Dog Set 375 NC x 375 6 42 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MeE A Kinetek Company la _ 2 Screw Knurled Cup Set 375 NC x 375 42 3 Nut Whiz 25NC 438
95. electric power mains to each controller including necessary circuit breakers and or fused mainline disconnect switches along with compliant piping and conduit Each car shall also include an earth ground Materi als and installation shall meet all applicable national and local electrical codes 8 Single phase 120 VAC power for car lighting and alarm circuit provided to each control ler including necessary circuit breaker and or fused disconnect switches along with compliant piping and conduit Materials and installation shall meet all applicable national and local electrical codes 9 Temporary power shall be provided without cost to the elevator contractor during con struction and shall match all characteristics of the permanent power supply 10 Divider beams for rail brackets shall be provided as required by code and design requirements as noted on job specific Shop Drawings 1 Blockout cutout through wall as required to accommodate hall button boxes signal fix tures hatch duct governor access doors and rope drops in machine room 12 Cutting of walls floor etc and removal of such obstructions as may be necessary for proper installation of the elevator 13 Provide for any repairs such as grouting patching and painting made necessary by such cutting 14 Grouting of door sills hoistway frames and signal fixtures after installation of the eleva tor equipment 15 painting except for factory MCE primer and paint 16
96. in the hoistway without contacting the pit floor If this is not possible excess cable may be looped back up and attached to the initial cable drop The important thing is to sus pend the full weight of the cable 2 Forsteel core cables we provide the Draka Universal Hanger Always secure the weight load in the strand vise of the hanger first then tighten the hose clamps This prevents cable rotation or conductor layer slippage 3 Forjute core cables use the appropriately sized mesh grip provided in the MCE elevator package 4 The cable end or loop should clear the pit floor by at least one foot to allow room for straightening The cable should be hung for a minimum of 24 hours Figure 3 38 Pre hanging Round Traveler Cable Steel core hanging Alternative to full example length hanging DO NOT let this noose tighten on cable Steel bracket welded J steel supports Strand vise Curved bracket shaped to cable Stainless steel clamps Loop at least one foot off floor and not touching wall 3 46 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Traveler and Hoistway Cables Cable Loop When Hanging When installing the traveler be careful not to twist or rotate the cable This helps ensure smooth operation and a hanging cable that does not twist It is also important that the loop of cable under the car is properly sized It should be equal to the diameter of the traveler multi plied by 30 thirty
97. is placed very close to a drive sheave in order to make an elevator design more compact The use of multiple sheaves places makes the rope work even harder as it has to adjust to additional bend cycles The lessening of space between the drive sheave and additional sheaves in tandem with increased bending cycles accelerates the fatigue process Suspension Rope Information Brugg i LINE During production Brugg ropes are marked across their surface with a painted line called an i Line More than a simple identity mark it is the only efficient way during installation for professionals to detect and prevent potential rope rotation and twisting Correctly installed ropes deliver longer product lifetimes greater safety comfort and less service downtimes Constructional Stretch Whenever a load is applied to the helically set wires and strands of a wire rope these elements react in a constrictive manner and compress the core This brings all the components closer together creating a slight reduction in overall rope diameter and a lengthening of the rope itself Ropes with strand or steel wire cores exhibit less constructional stretch than those with fiber cores Overall steel cores offer superior stretch characteristics in comparison to standard sisal cores It is difficult to define a finite value for constructional stretch due to a mix of factors such as the type of core rope construction helix length grade or grades
98. lubrication can lead to a rope core drying up and failing to provide the necessary amount of support to the rope strands Rouging can also indicate that a solvent or a lubricant applied to the rope is insufficient to the task and has diluted the existing lubricant and dried out the core and wires within the strands It is important to note that field lubrication does not counteract the effects of rouging and cannot restore ropes to their proper operating condition Rouging is a sign of internal rope degradation and the application of lubrication can only clean and retard further damage Seale Construction The most prevalent strand design in the entire elevator industry is Seale Construction Due to a combination of design machinery maintenance installation and environmental factors wire ropes are abraded over time The big outer wires in Seale Construction offer a large metallic surface that permits a large amount of abrasion before wire failure Seizing Seizing is the technical term for the process of securing a wire rope prior to cutting Secure seizure prevents movement of the individual strands and lay lengths during cutting and preserves rope s overall structural integrity Suspension Rope Information Improperly or loosely seized ends can become distorted or flattened leading to open strands and core slippage Improper seizing creates poor load distribution conditions in the strands which can seriously sh
99. out the natural fibers of the core will absorb moisture and degrade Brugg recommends that in new construction situations where there is inherently extra dust and exposure the ropes should be lubricated the first time immediately upon installation completion This is also an important consideration for ropes that have a full steel core or a mixed core Lubrication should be handled professionally as it is critical that the friction between ropes and the sheave must be maintained within certain established upper and lower limits Too much lubrication can cause loss of car control ropes that are too dry un lubricated can create excess lifting capacity Proper tensioning is key to rope life expectancy and performance It is highly recommended that tensions between elevator ropes should be maintained within plus or minus 1096 To accomplish this Brugg offers its RPM Rope Performance Measurement device This highly TECH TIPS BASIC INFORMATION accurate device offers professionals a reliable fast and easy method of checking rope tensions Rope tensions should be checked and equalized at installation and then semi annually at a minimum As sheaves or ropes wear or if the system is particularly aggressive to the ropes a tension check may need to be executed more frequently It only takes 1596 unequal tension to make a significant impact in the wear and performance of hoist ropes When the load factor for the highest tensi
100. overall service lifetimes WHEN IS LUBRICATION NECESSARY Lubrication is suggested if rope appears dry We recommend that ropes be lubricated once per year at a minimum gt NON b 1 ANN NIS WE Ss 1 he 4 4 HOW MUCH LUBRICANT IS REQUIRED For rope diameters of 0 39 to about 1 inch apply 0 35 pt about 70 2 liters of lubricant per 328 ft 100 meters of rope length is recommended LUBRICATION GUIDELINES Ropes should be lubricated routinely with even application over the entire surface of the rope Lubrication outdoors must only be carried out in dry weather It is essential that the rope is clean prior to lubrication We recommend that ropes be lubricated once per year at a minimum or once every 250 000 cycles starts trips MRL Maintenance Suspension Rope I nformation GROOVE GEOMETRY Brugg VT Lubricant is a blue green light bodied oil that has been specially designed for use as a field dressing on elevator ropes and has been formulated with high quality paraffinic oil fortified with additives to provide good oxidation and corrosion protection It offers excellent stability and anti wear capabilities and superior penetration and moisture displacement properties VT Lube contains no solvents and has a high flash point Brugg recommends a lubricant for elevator ropes with an ISO grade of 10 a Viscosity Index ASTM D 2270 of no lower than 80 with a Viscosity 104 40 C CST
101. pads noting correct location of tapped holes for car apron on bottom Refer to MCE construction drawings and ensure the platform is correctly oriented 7 Secure platform to isolation pads using hardware provided Figure 3 7 Platform Surface Install 2 layers of 3 4 plywood provide a smooth durable surface for cab con struction and floor installation Referring to the illustration above for standard jobs two layers of 3 4 plywood will have been installed on the platform at the factory If the cab is provided by the car sill will have been attached at the factory as well If a customer provided cab is used the sill must be installed in the field in accordance with the cab drawings and with MCE construction drawings MeE Platform and Hoistway Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Limit Switch Operating Cam The hoistway switch operating cam is provided in two sections A joining piece with slotted bolt holes joins the two for increased rigidity and strength The cam is attached to one of the car stiles in the location shown in the final construction drawings for the job Figure 3 8 Hoistway Switch Operating Cam Hardware 4 places Countersunk bolts Joining plate Allen drive A A ZZ EC YD D Hoistway Switch Controller Dependency You may receive either a Motion 4000 controller or an iControl controller depending on job requirements Hoistway switch arrangements for the two are diffe
102. peau aienbs y eo 1snfpe HU3HSVM 39uV1 MISAS 38VnDS 6 4915 se p224102 50015 uonisod 01 uea 9g yiys 54015 ajqeisnipy uonne 01 6 095 0 51015 ajqeisn pe poeddinbo seinssaid 99UM ajqemoyye 10 deis 01 upul in od ym p ddinb J 9JON HO YM puey Aq s uA apis aui PYS 01 9 qissod 1 p sn pe Kuiedoud ueuM opis uo ainssaid jaaym 6392 01 ZL 841 06 01 GZ sjuesaJdaJ siy JO sjoauM ule y pue 0 91 1 O 28 pesseuduioo We epis pun sinu Bunsn pe apis y eunsseJd epis 1snfpy S LAN NILSNFAY epinB Jo jenba o9uM JoJo 908 y 12 9g HOJ puey Aq J9 0 Y pnis 01 9 qissod IM 1 p sn pe Auiedoud ueuM sjueunsnfpe Jeuunj Aue eJojeq 8 se uedoud paubye 1841 auns ag JO e 9 o ujeeueq Jo pue doi uo Jojo
103. per MCE s require ments as indicated on MCE s approved final layout drawings Refer to quote and drawings for additional materials to be supplied By Others MRL Control Space 1 Anenclosed and protected control space is to be provided in compliance with local ele vator and building codes Walls are to have a two hour fire rating or a rating which meets local code 2 Access to the control space is to be safe and convenient It must not obstruct hallways or emergency exits A 42 space is required in front of the control space door for service barriers Barricades shall be provided in the case of closet controller space The barri cade shall provide a minimum of 39 of working space The barricade shall be capable of withstanding 250 1b f with less than 1 2 of deflection It shall also be fastened to the floor in such a way as to prevent movement if horizontal force is applied 3 Temperature control and ventilation are required in the control space Temperature is to be maintained between 32F and 104F with relative humidity not to exceed 95 non condensing 4 Theaccess door shall be self closing and self locking The access door shall be openable from the inside without a key 5 The access door shall have the same fire rating as the walls of the control space 6 Thelock and keying system for the control space door shall conform to locally applicable building and elevator codes Requirements should be coordinated with the elevat
104. position 3 16 Gripping Jaws 6 11 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Maintenance NOILVOO T1 YONYSAOD AT8IN3SSV 1 6 3791X774 08 009 5 Sg1000 91 55040 XVIN B E 02 05 9 9 09 62 9 ALAAVS dO S N OL JOHS ACIND ONILOANNOO S3 1OH ONILNNOW i l Q O3M v Me Veit gt O N 9 6 dV 1 S NI TS dO S N OL A134VS NILOJNNOO S31OH ONILNNOW 665 PEG 02 E 60 1 9 069 4 r UI Manual 42 02 EP02 6 12 MRL Maintenance Car and Counterweight Safeties Table 6 3 Parts List 480 Flexible Guide Clamp Safety O PARTNO _ _ DESCRIPHON 00 DESCRIPTION 1 4 jaw 2R H 2L H Jaw 2RH 2LH 480 2 4 ee R H 2 L H 11 12 15 22 1 2 Rails 480 2 1 4 2 R H 2 L H 18 1 2 30 Rails 22 Arm Grip 11 thru 18 1 2 Rails 480 4 2 Arm Grip 22 1 2 30 Rails 480 4 2 Plate 11 thru 18 1 22 Rails Ei me ReHURGBVM RE 7000000007 G 6 A _ 7 de S 40874 2 j 4 jm S 10 peon 2 j Bracket Grip Arm Spring I p ring iu ea agii Spring 22172 Ras tee 12 usn 1 Leve 480 13 4 Spacer 11 thru 18 1 24 Rails 481 13 2
105. properly will result in short ened rope life and potentially vibration in the elevator car when running Rope must not be mechanically damaged dented or kinked If any damage is evident replace the rope prior to commissioning A Caution Before roping validate rope type listed on the construction drawings for each car Be certain you understand what the stretch characteristics of the rope are so that the correct length of is pulled through at the shackles Once rope is shackled and load applied it cannot be lengthened Contact MCE if you are not CERTAIN of rope stretch Table 3 3 Rope Stretch Maximum Post Maximum Construction Diameter Construction Construction Stretch per Stretch per 100 100 10 Bx 19 8x19 traction stee 7 stee 0 5 76inche es 0 145 1 75 inches es uz 8518 traction 6 145 L 75 inches 5 8 8 19 traction steel 0 596 6 inches 0 14596 1 75 inches 10mm 8x19 extra high strength 0 596 6 inches 0 145 1 75 inches 1 2 8x19 extra high strength 0 596 6 inches 0 145 1 75 inches 5 8 8x19 extra high strength 0 596 6 inches 0 14596 1 75 inches Rope Handling Rope must be properly and carefully handled In addition to avoiding damage and dirt you must also remove the rope from the spools properly to avoid kinking Generally Raisethe reel so it can be easily rotated Have one person walk the rope away from the ree
106. the car sling and platform is raised hoisted to the top of the shaftway to be roped it must be positively secured by setting the car safeties at this elevated level In addition one or a combination of the following must be completed 1 2 3 Roller guides must be mounted before moving the sling and platform A deck or platform of sufficient strenoth must be built immediately below the car plat form to support the platform in the event of a safety failure The car sling must be positively secured by placing bolts through the car guide rails so the safety Jaws rest on these bolts or using other approved supports Additionally the top member of the car sling crosshead must be lashed to the rails and or divider beams using at least one wire rope sling of sufficient strength per rail prevent deterioration of the slings padding or other means of protection must be pro vided at the points where the slings contact the structural members 3 11 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Counterweight Installation Materials required to install the counterweight are Counterweight Frame Assembly Counterweight Buffer Counterweight roller guides ELSCO D or C models refer to construction drawings Rope stretch compensation blocks Counterweight fillers weights Refer to construction drawings to see if starter weights are used prior to stacking remaining weights
107. the other so that the lengths of the individual ropes will be the same Isolation washers springs and hardware are provided These examples for 2 1 roping 1 1 roping is similar Figure 3 25 Typical Stagger Pattern Wedge Socket Kit A A cE C T ANA ANN ANN WWW WWW WWW WWW cotter pin Double nuts from socket kit Pan Washer from shackle kit for rod diameter x Nylon isolation bushing shaft descends into spring Washer sized to fit around shaft of nylon bushing Washer from spring kit sized to protect bushing Bushing shaft ascends into spring Bushing shaft descends into hitch plate Hitch plate Isolation kit Machine Room Floor penetrations for rope fall locations to be provided per MCE construction drawings Mini mum rope clearances must be maintained in all directions Floor sleeves may be required Such determination must be made locally by the elevator contractor 3 28 Manual 42 02 01 MCE Elevator Packages Hoist Ropes Rope Wedge Sockets Figure 3 26 Wedge Socket I nstallation art information courtesy of BRUGG 1 Insert end of rope down through wedge socket Ensure rope is not slack Thread end of rope back up front side of socket leaving minimal loop to install wedge Be sure rope is placed as shown in socket 2 Install wedge Pull on rope to maintain tension Pull up loose end quickly Loop
108. voma iie _ 4 50 Placing the Camera and Hoistway Signs 4 51 I ua saca S s dde 49 a dO REOR RU ORC CREE EU HR ON 4 52 Programmable Logic Controller Setup 4 53 Default Language Liao durbEX RA ERR ER RR E EP 4 53 oe ek ee ETSI ____ dir 4 53 About the Self 4 54 Passenger Rescue 4 55 Section 5 Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions 9 4 593 SO ARGRUEERSERIRMEERTEREPUCIS VAT EFE 5 1 Car Locking Bolt Operation 5 2 LONE 2 5 2 MRL Manual Passenger Rescue Assist System 5 3 Passenger Rescue 5 4 PMAC Machine Information 5 5 Static Learn using KEB Drive 9 9 gt 5 6 Rescue Assist System 5 6 Installing Data Plates and Safety 5 0 5 7 d oot __ __ _ _ T 5 7 sss D 7 Door Operator Data Plate
109. will not contact switch wiring conduit Hydraulic buffers must be extended and filled with oil before use Recheck 30 minutes after ini tial fill and periodically thereafter Figure 3 21 Hydraulic Buffer Restraining bolt h Buffer switch _ Dip Stick Manufacturer data plate Restraining bolt Allows the buffer to be held in a compressed position during shipment Once a buffer is mounted in place the restraining bolt is removed to allow the buffer to extend A Danger Buffer extension can happen quickly Keep clear to avoid injury 3 22 Manual 42 02 EP01 MCE Elevator Packages Car Buffers Dip stick The dip stick is topped with a wing nut Lightly tightening the wing nut secures the dip stick and seals against possible contamination After installing and extending the buffer remove the dip stick and fill the buffer with the proper hydraulic oil Thereafter check oil level using the dip stick After initial fill allow the buffer to sit for thirty minutes before checking level Add more oil if needed Table 3 1 Buffer Oil D T E 26 Nuto H 68 Tellus Oil 68 Sunvis 831 WR Rando oil 68 These hydraulic oils meet ISO VG 68 requirements Buffer switch Connect in the elevator safety string as shown in the controller job prints taking care that when compressed the switch actuator rod will not contact switch wiring or conduit Manufacturer data plate Describes the buffer and indicates oil ty
110. with the actuating mechanism of the safeties Observe jurisdictional and code guidelines NEVER lubricate governor rope For MRL applications some jurisdictions require access doors Review MCE construction drawings to see if an access door has been designated Final confirmation must be made with the inspecting authority and coordinated with the general contractor This is the responsibility of the elevator contractor On a Floor Machine Room The overspeed governor may be mounted directly on the floor or it may be mounted on a support bracket depending on design and load bearing Observe jurisdictional and code guidelines Floor rope perforations should be kept as small as possible Sleeves may be required and if so must be provided locally by the elevator contractor The mounting holes on the overspeed governor base plate are slotted to provide some lateral adjustment For now secure the unit lightly Once the tensioner is mounted in the pit the two sheaves may be aligned for plumb and then tightened securely The rope must also align with the actuating mechanism of the safeties NEVER lubricate governor rope 3 34 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Car Governor Installation H W Tension Weight I nstallation and Safety Linkage Mount the governor tension weight to the car guide rail using forged clips and provided hard ware as shown in the MCE construction drawings Figure 3 31 Tension Weight Install Overview Gover
111. z N 5 2 Y IQQ e om o O e Sg D Tl o e 5 3 2 lt 90 zuo o MN 5285 m o s D W 5 D 2 RR et ES N O15 1 aS Hoan 4 0 A 5 Pa 5 96 gt gt 2 9 2 og 5 m im D D em gt gt aA Rez b TE B 0 A ae 8 Q gt lt o Qa a I N m rm 2 22 7 5 o lt p O O o o 5 8 gg m 7 c gt D 2 gt D O m c 2 295 ONIDGNN 39IA3G 3 LNOHLIM SHOOG ONILYVd 2 INIL 9NISOTO WAWINIA 907 89 099 9 719 269 69 5 975 22 9 OG 827 22 Y Orr 8 2 Lye ere 962 222 092 002 069 899 079 729 09 629 199 92 9 2 5 06 897 Gr v Ezy 107 62 992 vee 2 7 062 292 Gv c osik G 9 99 269 10 9 889 99 S 229 10 S 627 22 O VE Y 266 0 4 Gre 726 so e 282 loc OOLL 099 829 19 965 92 5 299 22 9 11 S 68 897 92 VO ese cO 6 5 862 2
112. 000 Ibs 0 96 Ibs ft 1 43 kg m 7 8 in 22 2 mm 42000 Ibs 52600 Ibs 1 11 Ibs ft 1 65 kg m 15 16 in 23 8 mm 48000 Ibs 60000 Ibs 1 27 Ibs ft 1 89 kg m 1 25 4 mm 54000 Ibs 68400 Ibs 1 45 Ibs ft 2 16 kg m ade E Available in 1370 1770 N mm dual tensile 1570 N mm or 1770 N mnr Other diameters available se S05 on request Some sizes also available in iron grade or galvanized wires For further information contact your Sales or Engineering Department representative 5620095 25879 Disponible en 1370 1770 N mm tensi n dual 1570 N mm 1770 N mm Otros di metros son disponibles 29 e por encargo Algunos tama os tambi n son disponibles en una categor a de hierro o alambres galvanizados Para m s informaci n favor de comunicarse con su representante de nuestro departamento de ventas o ingenier a Governor Rope 3 8 in 9 5 mm Hoist Machine Rope 478 10 0 mm 525 1 2 in 12 7 mm 808 5 8 in 16 0 mm 6 18 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Brugg Wire Rope LLC The American Society of Mechanical Engineers is one of the most highly respected organizations of engineers in the world Focused on keeping mechanical engineers current in the latest technical educational and research issues in various fields of engineering including the elevator industry the ASME sets internationally recognized industrial and manufacturing codes and standards to enhance public
113. 02 EPO1 MCE Elevator Packages Door Operator and Hatch Door Equipment Door Operator and Hatch Door Equipment Car doors door headers hangers tracks sill and additional hardware are provided Depending upon job specifications you may receive GAL SmarTraq or other door operator Doors and Door Hardware Standard MCE doors are heavy duty dual panel doors with pre tapped door sheave hanger attachment points The elevator car transom lower edge is equipped with pre installed channels to facilitate installing an angle also provided that in turn bolts to the header assembly pro vided with the door operator Figure 4 49 Transom Ledge with Header Attachment Channel Pre installed channel bolt assemblies provide a mounting point for an angle that in turn attaches to the door header plate Drawings provided with the header assembly show door track hanger and hardware installa tion The door operator is also provided with instructions for installation and adjustment Hall Stations Install hall station lantern and position indicator boxes as shown in the drawing package Be certain that you are using the proper techniques per fire safety and wire run guidelines for the jurisdiction Wire hall stations lanterns and position indicators as shown in the controller job drawings and approved fixture drawings Car Operating Panels Innovation fixtures are standard with MCE elevator packages Other manufacturers may have been sp
114. 03 5RHMS Cd 4 _ 424 8632 Cd 1 38 501 022 3 3890 Angle 801 002 o7 1 38 6 5 or 11 98 1 8 8 FlexConduit 6 460 036 _ Nec Washer Spacer 0 375 Cd Motion Control Engineering Elevator Packages Car Governor Installation Counterweight Governor I nstallation If floors below the elevator are occupied a counterweight governor may be required Refer to the MCE construction drawings The counterweight and car governors and tension weight sheaves are clearly labeled to prevent confusion as to their intended locations and uses Refer to the controller job prints for wiring information As with the car governor counterweight governor rope should never be lubricated The geometry of the installation will dictate the mounting location of the counterweight gover nor It may be mounted on a beam in the overhead on the floor in the machine room or in unusual cases on a mount clamped to a counterweight guide rail The construction drawings for the installation will clearly indicate where the governor mounts for any particular installa tion 3 39 MeE kii _ Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Switches If hoistway wiringis in place connect the governor and tensioner if required switches into the controller safety string as shown in t
115. 12 8 FRONT ELEVATION SIDE WALL ELEVATION 79 1 2 SHELL INSIDE 25 13 16 25 1 8 25 13 16 1 4 1 4 73 3 DIA BAR RAIL 69 1 4 HANDRAIL 11 8 49 3 DIA BAR RAIL 45 1 4 HANDRAIL _ 55 3 4 SHELL CLEAR INSIDE 42 CLEAR OPENING PLAN VIEW a o 25 13 16 NYLUBE 2 SPEED FAN WITH GRILLE ba 25 1 VENT SLOTS 25 13 16 T BACK WALL ELEVATIO Fis JAM 222 Ho CANOPY VIEW 4 43 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Figure 4 46 Detail of Standard Cab Ceiling Frame Section POLYGAL LAY IN SHEET CUT TO SIZE CEILING FRAME CONNECTOR WELDED TO INSIDE OF FRAME 14 GA STAINLESS STEEL T CROSS SECTION CROSS SECTION CONNECTOR WELDED OR REMOVABLE 14GA 1 1 2 X 1 1 2 STAINLESS STEEL ANGLE Figure 4 47 Hand Rail Detail CAR INTERIOR WALL PANELS STEEL OUTER CAR SHELL HANDRAIL SPACER 11 2 4 STAINLESS STEEL FINISH 3 8 x 1 1 4 BOLT LW RAIL BACKING PLATE 0 065 ST STL 4 TYP 4 44 Manual 42 02 EP01 Elevator Packages Cartop Handrail Ca
116. 1841 samea 1ueunsn pe g EPON 02573 gt TIVH3JAO 2 Ul 7 L 6 dO 1 3074 INOtd ul z LG 181 EE 0 ul 7 Z IVY 81 091 1 NO TIVH3AO ul 72 ZL d 2 91 L u 91 11 1 3716 TWNLIY NMOHS B SPECIFICATIONS Size and Weight 9 3 4 248mm Widi ICCB 12 3 324mm Depth Overall 9 1 4 235mm OHIDDIBO WEIOFPE oscar 31 Ibs 14 1kg Mounting Bolt Holes FOU x resents 11 16 x 1 1 16 17mm x 27mm Bolt Hole 5 Refer to Mounting Template Roller Wheels DIIS Seca oe A ok ee 1 1 4 32mm Neoprene Tread Width face amp side arm roller wheel 13mm Polyurethane Tread Width face roller wheel 172 13mm Polyurethane Tread Width side arm roller wheel 7 8 22mm DAMET J iss sas AA 6 152mm sca 0 7874 20mm Runout Total Indicator 0 002 051mm PARTS LIST 8 6 v r PN
117. 2 03 400 2 34 460 450 4545 450 4545 992 10 020 992 10 020 6 48 219 8 62 639 25 15 363 14 29 12 80 28 22 1 77 0 46 279 10 98 773 30 43 437 17 20 14 80 32 63 2 20 0 58 FM 02218 C Manual 42 02 EP02 SEB 25 2 2 54 500 2 92 575 450 4545 992 10 020 435 17 13 1122 44 17 630 24 80 20 00 44 10 3 30 0 87 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company seh range QUA WI III III WWM EI MAII NM E m E 4 r Ev ne L ae SEB 16 2 SEB 18 2 SEB 20 2 SEB 25 2 Designed to provide a cost effective solution to applications between 1 6 and 2 54m s rated speed The exceptionally wide mass range simplifies buffer selection whilst reducing inventory All SEB buffers are maintenance free subject to statutory routine inspection Options available include switch assembly optional base plate sizes outdoor use explosion proof MRL Maintenance Car and Counterweight Buffers Oleo LB Series heavy installations 1 6 4 06 m s 315 800 ft min 500 8330 kg 1100 18 360 Ibs Model LB 16 003 LB 18 001 LB 20 001 LB 23 00 Rated speed m s 1 60 1 80 2 03 2 30 ft min 315 355 400 453 Maximum m s 1 84 2 07 2 34 2
118. 21105 peisnfpe J 930N s1nu 2o Ua 4YH MON y Jo 991 s uA pue do hun sMa45s bup en apis UN pue s nuy20 uasoo 6up en We apis 1snfpe Ayessadau si 1 JI puey Aq y 415504 aq saunssaid yy epu Asiou e Aq ue 51005 4 BUYS 51 1o1eA 99 51005 qissod Se MO Se aJnssaJd 21 15 das s 31 e e d ul M S 1ueunsn pe Ajaundas 1nu 2o ue1ubn Jas 51120 esiM3sod Jo y 3IAJ S 0 Buluin1 1 u A pue u un1 paads suni LIAS Ajaandas 5 1ueunsn fpe pue sinu Jo pue syoq yey suns aq 0152205 So2ueJeo 1510 yay o1 p ds uon edsur je umop pue dn y u10q ul Jo01e sJa epu syueuusnf pe je 193 v 1 ou p u p nous pue opez 991 JaS aid swaJ5s epis eu 1oNlIed Jo sjaaym woyoq pue doi y 10 ae aues B
119. 22 99 vec 050 7 9 2 9 209 285 19 S O S 61 S 86 827 Gv 9 v GIy G6 726 Ese 266 216 62 0 2 822 000 829 709 285 29 S Z s 925 905 98 99 907 686 vO e vi e 726 voe 87 292 056 91169 12 s 299 ces Z s ezr eov eev vrv voc vze 956 922 9 2 962 ozz 992 922 006 66v 8 9 097 8 7 207 98 2 0 4 vo e SEE 22 lt 90 062 222 192 c 922 602 261 221 009 AemsioH pue jo 217 277 00 S8 07 vo e 6 eze 80 262 772 292 162 9L O07 98 6971 v6 S 7 5 99 9 92 9 219 86 6277 097 Orv 127 207 Eve vo e 924 90 82 892 OFZ LL 929 99 669 OG 205 vov 977 227 607 066 ege ve e 9L 62 622 092 vc HO 825 079 22 705 98 89 09 267 VL 06 82 e 092 cre 726 90 882 022 29 2 vec 972 861 092 6 8 vOG 8 697 2 7 O0 282 SO oee EVE 962 ezz 92 erz 922 602 L61 6 5 205 98 69 05 GE GL Y 207 98 896 zoe se e 8 6 Loe 582 892 52 BL VOC VE bry 927 ki 76 282 796 292 se e 80 voz 6Zc voc 042 922
120. 3 8 in 8 0 10 0 mm PAG RII P 1258 7116 5 8 in 11 0 16 0 mm 6 34 11 16 3 4 17 5 19 0 mm Description Descripci n 3 8 1 2 5 8 FEIWNNG CIP 3 4 REANNGCIP E Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono 1 706 235 6315 Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorope prugg com www bruggrope com 6 38 Manual 42 02 EP02 MRL Maintenance Overspeed Governor Overspeed Governor By code overspeed governors may not be repaired or modified in any substantial fashion Maintenance is primarily cleaning visual checks and occasional lubrication six months the overspeed governor should be checked for proper operation During normally scheduled overhead maintenance Check for damage or distortion of governor structural elements Check for sheave groove wear on the governor and the tension weight sheave as well Check that the rocker lever moves freely Lubricate if necessary Check the governor rope for wear or damage DO NOT lubricate governor Check safety switch function by operating it by hand Keep the governor free of dirt and debris Governor Technical Drawings Governor technical drawings are included on the following pages 6 39 MeE p p 35
121. 35 6315 can be detected in time Fax 706 235 1394 The determination of the time when the Toll Free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 is to be discarded and the monitoring of info elevatorrope brugg com rope installations is made in accordance with DIN 15020 sheet 2 and ASME A17 1 table 10001 2 2 29 a A17 2 1 table 3 29 1 a Depending on the type and number of wire breaks the number of bearing wires in the outer strands is critical in determining rope discard times We recommend that regular inspections be scheduled and recorded and that attachments are also inspected www bruggrope com Brugg Drahtseil AG Wydenstrasse 36 5242 Telefon 41 0 56 464 42 42 41 0 56 464 42 37 www brugg drahtseil ch 2007 Brugg Wire Rope LLC 6 31 Maintenance 0 92 gal 3 5 Moers 7 27 3 3 Lubrication every 250 000 starts or when the rope or sheave groove feels dry to the touch Lubrication is important for moving steel parts University and technical studies have determined that failing to lubricate can reduce the life of the rope by over 50 percent You should also review the environment where the hoist ropes are installed If the elevator is operating in either a very dry and hot environment or one that is dusty you should think seriously on basic lubrication frequency One critical point behind re lubrication is to keep the core of the rope sisal healthy When left to dry
122. 44 Driving Machine page 6 50 Door Operator page 6 54 6 1 Motion Control Engineering MeE A Kinetek Company General Information uses quality components from several manufacturers We provide single site support for all equipment that is part of the installation package we sell Please contact Motion Control Engineering Voice 916 463 9200 Fax 916 463 9201 Web www mceinc com General Requirements Maintenance repairs and replacements of equipment shall conform to Section 8 6 of ASME A17 1 CSA B44 to code at the time of installation and to code requirements at the time of any alteration Safety If any defective part directly affects operational safety the equipment shall be taken out of ser vice until the part has been adjusted repaired or replaced Records The contracting organization responsible for maintaining the elevator equipment shall create maintain and keep available written records including Description of task performed and dates Description and dates of examinations tests adjustments repairs or parts replacement Description and dates of call backs and issue reports including corrective actions taken Records of findings on firefighter s service operation required by ASME 8 6 10 1 Records must be available to elevator personnel Copies of maintenance and call back forms are included at the back of this manual page 6 60 A Danger Safety Devices shall not
123. 450 mm around all machine room equipment Clear unobstructed distance minimum of 40 inches or 1000 mmy in front of controller disconnect s and electrical equipment Guard rails top and mid rails kick plate to eliminate trip and fall hazards in machine room All machine room wiring completed If machine room and or control room are remote provide a permanent means of communication between the elevator car and remote machine room and or control room 5 10 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Preinspection Checklist Table 5 1 Preinspection Checklist Main Disconnect Switch Correctly rated fuses or circuit breakers ockable type disconnect Auxiliary contact for emergency lowering positively opened mechanically opening not solely dependent on springs Clear unobstructed distance minimum of 40 inches 1000 mm in front of disconnect Properly labeled for the related elevator equipment Automatic emergency recall operation functioning as specified Emergency power or standby power functioning or able to simulate operation with elevator equipment as specified Manual emergency recall operation functioning as specified Building fire control station emergency recall switch installed and functioning A pit drain must be installed if the elevator is provided with firefighter s emergency operation Pit Enclosure Permanent means to prevent the accumulation of grou
124. 51 1 57 1 63 1 69 1 75 1 81 1 87 Door Opening Width inch 1 Code Zone Distance inch 6 56 Manual 42 02 EPO2 0 94 1 03 1 11 1 20 1 28 1 37 1 45 1 54 1 63 1 71 1 80 1 88 1 97 2 05 2 14 2 22 2 31 2 39 2 48 2 57 2 65 0 99 1 08 1 17 1 26 1 35 1 44 1 53 1 61 1 70 1 79 1 88 1 97 2 06 2 15 2 24 2 33 2 42 2 51 2 60 2 69 2 78 of Car and Hoistway 600 1 03 1 12 122 1 31 1 41 1 50 1 59 1 69 1 78 1 87 1 97 2 06 2 15 2 25 2 34 2 44 2 53 2 62 2 72 2 81 2 90 300 350 400 450 500 550 2 Combined Weight 1 11 1 21 1 32 1 42 1 52 1 62 1 72 1 82 1 92 2 02 2 13 2 23 2 33 2 43 2 53 2 63 2 73 2 83 2 93 3 04 3 14 1 15 1 26 1 36 1 47 1 57 1 68 1 78 1 89 1 99 2 10 2 20 2 30 2 41 2 51 2 62 2 72 2 83 2 93 3 04 3 14 3 25 1 19 1 30 1 41 1 51 1 62 1 73 1 84 1 95 2 06 2 16 2 27 2 38 2 49 2 60 2 70 2 81 2 92 3 03 3 14 3 25 3 35 1 23 1 34 1 45 1 56 1 67 1 78 1 90 2 01 2 12 2 23 2 34 2 45 2 56 2 68 2 79 2 90 3 01 3 12 3 23 3 35 3 46 900 1 26 1 38 149 1 61 1 72 1 84 1 95 2 07 2 18 2 30 2 41 2 52 2 64 2 75 2 87 2 98 3 10 3 21 3 33 3 44 3 56 1 30 1 41 1 53 1 65 1 77 1 89 2 00 2 12 2 24 2 36 2 48 2 59
125. 6 44 gt Check vertical and aligned with striker plates Verify springs properly seated Buffers Verify no spring deformation weakening or damage Verify marking plates in place Verify extended buffers are correct height Physically check oil levels As directed in the manufacturer manual Check brake shoe lining and clearance 6 50 gt Lubricate machine 6 50 gt Adjust brake 6 50 gt Check emergency lights signalling and operation See controller manual Check car handrails ceiling and hanging panels Check clean and lubricate roller guides See elevator install manual General 42 02 01 Check clean lubricate door operator and door operating linkages switches See SmarTraq Manual 42 02 D007 Check and clean positioning system See controller manual As directed in the manufacturer manual Lubricate brake solenoid Lubri Machine cate brake rod and spring washer assembly System tests as described in Pre inspection Inspection Guide 42 02 Note Suspension Ropes Connections Please refer to table of contents and index for additional direction 4 Manual 42 02 2 MRL Maintenance Car and Counterweight Safeties Car and Counterweight Safeties A INSTANTANEOUS SAFETY Choose the Hollister Whitney Type Instantaneous Safety for these important features Designed in compliance with all requirements of A
126. 6 52 EUM _ ___ Pd 6 52 LPs 6 53 Pont DEPO P 6 53 Doors and Door Operator 6 54 6 54 Or _ 6 54 Measuring Door Closing 6 54 Door Closing Time Compliance 6 54 Visit Log and Call Back Forms 6 60 Detailed Checklist ne ee a ee 6 62 vi Manual 42 02 01 5 17 11 Install Overview When installing an elevator the order in which a particular team proceeds will vary with their common practices and with the state of building construction when installation begins Preparation Inventory all material on the job site and store it in a secure clean dry location MCE standard warranty to apply e Clean the elevator pit of all debris Refer to construction drawings and Section 1 of this guide and ensure that the pit and hoistway have been properly constructed If the hoistway does not meet the require ments of the construction drawings elevator construction should be postponed until the hoistway is brought into compliance Site validation is the responsibility of the Elevator Contractor For MRL installations we highly recommend that the machine beams and machine be hoisted into place using a crane With
127. 65 pDeriorrYaaraYce striking speed ft min 362 408 460 522 Impact kg 500 8330 500 8330 500 8330 500 833 mass range 65 1102 18 364 1102 18 364 1102 18 364 1102 18 3 Stroke S mm 203 249 300 387 ins 7 99 9 80 11 81 15 24 Height H mm 609 715 831 1030 ins 23 98 28 15 32 72 40 55 Height J mm 355 414 479 591 ins 13 98 16 30 18 86 2327 Unit weight kg 25 70 28 20 30 70 36 20 less oil 65 56 67 62 18 67 69 79 82 Oil volume litres 4 62 5 58 6 64 8 45 ISO VG 68 U S gals 1 22 1 47 1 75 2 23 Note reduced stroke with approved terminal speed limiting device applying EN 81 rule 10 4 3 2 ASME 17 1 rule 201 4a t Rated speed m s ft min Environmental temperature acceptable conditions 15 C to 70 C Note for special conditions outside the above consult OLEO International Buffer must be securely supported and steadied vertically parallel to guide rails _ 5mm Non vertical applications consult OLEO International Buffer to be mounted in a suitable structure to support deceleration forces in accordance with installation sheet 7 87 FM 02218 LB 16 003 LB 18 001 6 49 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Driving Machine MCE uses AC permanent magnet gearless synchronous machines from Imperial Electric Please refer to the manual that accompanied the machine for complete information The infor mation provided here is very basic Examinati
128. CHED TO EACH OTHER WITH SUPPLIED 1 4 20 NUTS AND BOLTS ATTACHEMENT TO PLATFORM IS WITH SUPPLIED FLAT HEAD WOOD SCREWS IT IS IMPORTANT TO REMEMBER TO ATTACH PANELS BY THE NUMBERS IF INTERIOR PANELS AND HANDRAILS ARE PART OF PACKAGE OR IF MODIFICATIONS WERE MADE DURING SHOP SETUP PRE DRILLED HOLES MAY BE MISALIGNED RIGHT SIDE 4 34 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Figure 4 33 Front Return Attachment FRONT RETURN WILL HAVE CUTOUT FOR COP PER CUSTOMERS DRAWINGS OR INSTRUCTIONS IF OPTIONAL SWING RETURN 15 REQUIRED ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTION ARE PROVIDED WITH JOB SPECIFIC DRAWINGS FRONT RETURN SHOULD OVERLAP SILL BY 1 8 FOR ALUMINUM AND BY 1 4 FOR NICKEL SILVER AND BRONZE SILLS ATTACH FRONT RETURN TO SIDE WALL USING 1 4 20 X 3 4 SUPPLIED NUTS AND BOLTS MAKE SURE THAT THE RETURN SITS ATOP SILL AND LAPS ON ALUMINUM SILL BY 1 8 OR 1 4 LAP FOR NICKEL SILVER OR BRONZE IF LAPPING IS GREATER THE DOOR RUNNING CLEARANCE WILL BE TOO CLOSE 4 35 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Entrances Car and Positioning System Figure 4 34 Strike Jamb Attachment ATTACH STRIKE JAMB TO SIDE WALL USING SUPPLIED 1 4 20 X 3 4 BOLTS AND NUTS ALIGN STIKE WITH DAYLIGHT LINE MAKE SURE STRIKE JAMB IS 1 8 LAP OVER SILL FOR ALUMINUM OR 1 4 FOR NICKEL SILVER OR BRONZE STRIKE JAMB AND FRONT RETURN SHOULD BOTH SIT ON THE CAR SILL AT THE SAME DISTANCE Figur
129. CONTACT TERMS AND CONDITIONS Brugg Wire Rope LLC North America Production Sales BRUGG WIRE ROPE LLC Warranty conditions Transportation and Routing 1801 Parrish Drive All goods offered for sale by Brugg Wire Rope Inc Brugg Wire Rope shall have the sole control and PO Box 551 LLC hereinafter Brugg Wire Rope are offered for discretion with respect to mode of transportation Rome GA 30162 0551 USA sale only on those terms and conditions appearing and routing Phone 1 706 235 6315 on Brugg Wire Rope invoice forms A SUMMARY OF THE MORE IMPORTANT Risk of Loss Toll Free 1 866 542 7844 866 54BRUGG PROVISIONS OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS 1 706 235 1394 OF SALE IS REPRODUCED HEREIN The risk of loss of or damage to the goods shall info elevatorropeGbrugg com pass to a buyer at the time Brugg Wire Rope puts www bruggrope com General the goods in possession of a common carrier Europe Production All sales and charges for goods or services sold by Force Majeure Sales Office Brugg Wire Rope shall be subject to the terms and BRUGG WIRE ROPE INC conditions set forth on Brugg Wire Rope invoice ine ne 2 forms Such terms and conditions shall be the sole bie pis a e ud EDU gt a Wydenstrasse 36 and exclusive terms and conditions applicable to E ay Dy Statute OF OME ass CH 5242 Birr any sale majeure Switzerland _ Telefon 41 0 56 464 42 42 Brugg Wire Rope will not
130. Channels Pit channels are provided for the car and for the counterweight The channels install on the pit floor and provide buffer and guide rail support Refer to the layout drawing in the Construction Drawings package A sample layout drawing for a two car installation is shown below Figure 2 19 Sample Pit Layout 20 Clear Hoistway 247 18 SUMP LOCATION NEEDS VERIFICA TION Gs 00 ro Sy T ADMYSIOH JD9 D S IMO Ni PIT LAYOUT Channel Hold Downs The channel kit may include heavy duty angles to further secure car and counterweight chan nels in place If so if you determine additional anchoringis required 1 Determinethe best angle locations Mark and drill anchor holes Set floor anchors Lightly secure angles to anchors with bolt and locking washer Weld angles to channel Welds must be by an AWS certified welder 4 Securely tighten bolts Channel Angle welded to channel embedded in floor 2 19 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Counterweight Rails Counterweight rails mount on the inside of the combination brackets as shown in the final con struction drawings Place short rails if used as shown in the elevation drawing 1 Carefully plumb and set the combination brackets 2 Adjust the placement of the counterweight pit chann
131. D ALL VITAL DATA UPON THE DATA TAG 8 6 3 2 1 The wire rope data for the replacement rope must correspond to the wire rope data specified in 2 20 2 2 b c f and 2 for the other ropes DATA TAGS FOR REPLACEMENT ROPES SHALL BE AFFIXED TO THOSE REPLACEMENT ROPES 8 6 3 2 2 The replacement rope shall be provided with a wire rope data tag conforming to 2 20 2 2 IT IS NEVER ACCEPTABLE TO REPLACE A SINGLE DAMAGED ROPE WITH A NEW ONE IF THAT SET OF ROPES HAS ALREADY BEEN SHORTENED SINCE ITS ORIGINAL INSTALLATION 8 6 3 2 3 The suspension ropes including the damaged rope shall not have been shortened since their original installation YOU MAY NOT REPLACE A SINGLE DAMAGED ROPE WITH A NEW ONE IF ANY OF THE REMAINING ROPES MEASURE LESS THAN THE NOMINAL DIAMETER MINUS 0 4 MM 0 014 IN 8 6 3 2 4 The diameter of any of the remaining ropes shall not be less than the nominal diameter minus 0 4 mm 0 015 in Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com 6 20 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Brugg Wire Rope LLC TENSIONING MUST BE CHECKED ROUTINELY IF PROPER EQUALIZATION CANNOT BE MAINTAINED SIX MONTHS AFTER THE INSTALLATION OF A SET OF RO
132. Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Figure 4 16 Jamb Assembly and Installation continued FIGURE 8 2 5 Using 1 4 20 hardware Items J amp K attach the strike jamb Item 3 and the strike upright Item 4 together as shown in Figure 4 14 sub figure 3 2 The strike pocket should have a 1 recess when properly assembled 6 Adjust the sill offset clip Item 15 as needed Square jambs at bottom and check open ing width 7 Insert 2 3 8 bolts from bottom of each sill offset clip Item 15 through to the bottom flange of the return and strike jambs Items 2 amp 3 8 Fastenthe offset clips to the jambs securely with 3 8 hardware Items H amp I Re check door opening size and frames for level and plumb Adjust if needed 4 20 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors Figure 4 17 Door Assembly and Installation There are 2 door guides Item C packaged in a bag per entrance Use the hardware provided to attach the two gibs on the bottom edges of the door as shown in Figure 4 15 Adjustable gibs are used so determine proper gib setting prior to installation 1 One fire gib is provided per entrance Use the 10 x 1 2 flat head phillips screws Item to attach the guide to the bottom center of the door as shown in Figure 4 15 4 21 MeE Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 0000
133. Extension used at to a skid or packed in crate top and bottom of depending upon amount required hoistway Attaches to Top Header and Toe Guard HARDWARE SCHEDULE Shipped in box with formed fascia Hoistway Pack Hardware Double if hoistway has rear opening 4 1 4 x 1 Tap Ins Nail with Nylon Cover Finish Pack Hardware Items listed supplied for each opening 3 3 8 x 1 Bolts 3 3 8 Nuts 10 Tex Screws Top Header Extension 3 10 3 2 x 1 2 Screw One per Hoistway for 3 10 3 2 Nuts top landing Hardware Pack Fascia Items listed supplied for each set of Fascia angle supplied 2 3 8 x 1 Bolts 2 3 8 Nuts 6 Tex Screws 2 1 4 x 1 Tap Ins Sight Guard attachment 7 Tex Screws Header Extension Door Gibs 1 per entrance 2 Per door panel packed with attaching hardware Door fire Tab 1 Per door panel Door Bumpers 1 set per side opening entrance 2 Rubber bumpers with 3 8 Nuts set To be attached to Frame Step in holes pre punched If entrance is center opening doors supplied with astragal d f f Hanger Dust Cover 1 per entrance Flat Fascia Standard Lengths 12 18 24 30 36 42 and 48 Fascia Angle 2 per set Supplied if runs between floors are greater than 48 Sight Guard Door Panel Toe Guard Most cases one supplied per hoistway run If rear opening two suppied MeE Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering
134. F Fish rail joining Plates 2 16 Flat Traveler Cable 4 47 Front return 4 35 G General Rules for Rail Clips 2 13 protection 1 7 Governor Components 3 33 3 40 Governor Installation 3 33 Governor Mounting Assembly 3 34 Governor rope 3 40 governor Set or Test button 3 40 Governor Set Switch 3 40 Governor Speed Reducing Switch 3 40 Governor Switches 3 40 governor wire rope data 5 7 Grounding the installation 3 30 4 42 Guide rails Checks 6 43 Index 2 Manual 42 02 EP01 H Hall Entrances and Doors 4 2 Hall Stations 4 47 Handrail 4 40 Harnesses 1 9 Hitch Plate Connections 3 28 Hitch Plates 2 11 Hoisting equipment 2 6 Hoistway Electrical Package 1 2 Hoistway Qualification 1 5 Hoistway switch operating cam 3 2 hoistway switch operating cam 3 8 Hydraulic Buffer Specifications 3 23 In car inspection 5 2 Isolation Transformer 3 52 L Learning Encoder position 5 5 Load weigher 1 4 Lock the car in position 5 2 Locking counterweight fillers in place 3 20 Locking Device Sign 5 9 M Machine 2 6 Machine Bearing and Hitch Beams 2 5 Machine Groove Diameter Plate 5 8 Machine hoisting 2 6 Machine isolators 2 8 Machine maintenance and lubrication 2 11 Machine Room Access 5 10 Machine Room Door 5 10 Machine Room Enclosure 5 10 Main Disconnect Switch 5 11 Maintenance checklist Detailed 6 62 Maintenance Schedule 6 3 Manuals reference 6 1 MCE Contact Information 1 2 Minimum clearance bracket 2 15 Mon
135. KE TO PREDRILLED ATTACH ELECTRIC SWITCH TO POSTS AND ADJUST SO THAT IT BREAKS CONTACT PER ASME 17 1 CODE ATTACH FAN TO POSTS ATTACH DOOR OPERATOR ANGLES AT REQUIRED POSITION PER OPERATOR MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS ANGLES ATTACH TO EACH OTHER WITH 1 4 20 NUTS AND BOLTS ATTACH HEADER ANGLE TO TRANSOM 5 16 18 CARRIAGE BOLTS SET INTO SLOTS ON TRANSOM FOR ADJUSTMENT HEADER ANGLE PREDRILLED FOR PROPER PLACEMENT TO DAYLIGHT LINE WHEN BOLTED TO CARRIAGE BOLTS Figure 4 39 Interior Lights a DUAL TUBE LIGHT UNIT NO PREDRILLNG IS DONE ON LIGHT UNITS SO THAT OPTIMAL MOUNTING POSITION MAY BE DETERMINED AT SITE 2 DUAL TUBE LIGHT FIXTURES SUPPLIED PER CAB UNIT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED REFER TO JOB SPECIFIC CAB LIGHTING DRAWINGS 4 38 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Figure 4 40 Wall Clip and Reveal Placement ATTACH WALL PANEL CLIPS USING 10 SHEET METAL SCREWS TO PREDRILLED HOLES CLIPS SHOULD BE FACING UP SO WALL PANELS MAY SLIP DOWN INTO SPACE ON CLIP STANDARD APPLICATION IS 3 CLIPS PER PANEL ATTACH REVEAL PIECES WITH DOUBLE SIDED TAPE ALREADY APPLIED TO BACK SIDE OF REVEAL STRIPS BASE REVEAL IS APPLIED FIRST AT FLOOR HEIGHT VERTICAL REVEAL STRIPS ARE SET ON EDGE OF HORIZONTAL STRIP CORNER REVEAL FORMED AT 90 DEGREES AND FRONT REVEAL NOTCHED SO AS TO FIT TIGHT TO TRANSOM THAT JUTS OUT FROM RETURN AND STRIKE JAMB BY APPROXIMATELY 1 4 SHELL PANELS ARE MARKED F
136. M LOAD CAR CAPACITY COMPENSATION 15 000 Lbs 20 000 Lbs 13 000 Lbs 18 000 Lbs 6 MAXIMUM CAR SPEED 500 500 800 800 MAXIMUM TRIPPING SPEED 25 625 970 970 RAIL SIZE All except 8 Lb 18 5 22 5 amp 30 Lb All except 8 Lb 18 5 22 5 amp 30 Lb NOTE MODELS INCLUDING THOSE DESIGNED TO BE USED IN HIGHER SPEED APPLICATION MEET ASME CODE 17 1 REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION MODEL 480 FOR 500 AND BELOW IS APPROVED FOR G S A AND STATES OF CALIFORNIA PENNSYLVANIA AND WISCONSIN ALSO MODEL 481 FOR 500 FPM AND BELOW IS APPROVED FOR STATES OF PENNSYLVANIA AND WISCONSIN When Ordering Safeties Please Specify The Following e Car Speed Face to Face of Guide Rails Rail Size Governor Location Stile Size of Guide Shoes to be Used Gross Load Empty Car Weight amp Capacity Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Car and Counterweight Safeties 480 Flexible Guide Clamp Safety The 480 Safety has been preset to produce 3 16 rail clearance face of grip to side of rail and the spring pressure has been preset to produce a slide in accordance with A17 1 Elevator Code requirements However due to possible variances in rail surfaces car weights etc safety springs E may have to be re adjusted in the field 1 After bolting safety blocks to underside of car sling bottom channel center safety on rail There should
137. N st e 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 M6 48 50 52 54 56 58 2 100 0 84 0 92 0 99 1 07 1 15 1 22 1 30 1 38 1 45 1 53 1 61 1 68 1 76 1 84 1 91 1 99 2 07 2 14 2 22 2 30 2 37 1 19 1 30 1 41 1 51 1 62 1 73 1 84 1 95 2 06 2 16 2 27 2 38 2 49 2 60 2 70 2 81 2 92 3 03 3 14 3 25 3 35 250 1 33 1 45 1 57 1 69 1 81 1 94 2 06 2 18 2 30 2 42 2 54 2 66 2 78 2 90 3 02 3 14 3 27 3 39 3 51 3 63 3 75 1 57 1 72 1 86 2 00 2 15 2 29 2 43 2 58 2 72 2 86 3 01 3 15 3 29 3 43 3 58 3 72 3 86 4 01 4 15 4 29 4 44 1 68 1 84 1 99 2 14 2 30 2 45 2 60 2 75 2 91 3 06 3 21 3 37 3 52 3 67 3 83 3 98 4 13 4 28 4 44 4 59 4 74 1 79 1 95 2 11 2 27 2 43 2 60 2 76 2 92 3 08 3 25 3 41 3 57 3 73 3 89 4 06 4 22 4 38 4 54 4 71 4 87 5 03 1 88 2 05 2 22 2 39 2 57 2 74 2 91 3 08 3 25 3 42 3 59 3 76 3 93 4 11 4 28 4 45 4 62 4 79 4 96 5 13 5 30 1 97 2 15 2 33 2 51 2 69 2 87 3 05 3 23 3 41 3 59 3 77 3 95 4 13 4 31 4 49 4 66 4 84 5 02 5 20 5 38 5 56 of Car Hoistway 600 2206 2 25 2 44 2 62 2 81 3 00 3 19 3 37 3 56 3 75 3 94 4 12 4 31 4 50 4 68 4 87 5 06 5 25 5 43 5 62 5 81
138. NILSQ fV 3015 uonejeisur au je Pea synsai 1899 104 YM Ule e ejeudoudde ji Jo jnjaueo y yoadsul seAuJe 1ueuudius INOA uauM uonipuoo 0 pue pa1oedsul jjnja1eo 19j01 03S 13 uoneJedo peoue eq Jeo eui pue pue peuBije Auedoud S iel 10 eA9 9 JEU 19Buo pue eoueuuojied unuindo 104 uon amp JqiA pue asiou 0 pue suonipuoo Bunejedo 01 098719 1snfpe ued 5 941 sonsuaejoeJeuo Jouedns 1841 saunjeay 1ueunsn pe peubisep EPON 02573 HIGIM TIVH3AO 181 ul 8 1 Z i u 9L M r1 TIVH3AO 681 ul 7 1 9 09 30 3074 WOU Ul B E 2 WWLEL 7 e ul 8 L S M nas gam E En S310H 9NIINDOIN Lt ii 31 14 Y43409 TWNOLLdO m Perm h Co TTE gt ul 9 1 12 EM ul 91 81 __ uuo __ J ul 9L L u 8 6 Z 3716 TWNALIY NMOHS
139. NTERIOR PANEL AND FROM BACK WALL INTERIOR PANEL TO TRANSOM CEILING FRAME SHOULD BE PLACED TO HAVE 1 1 2 REVEAL ON ALL SIDES PLACE FRAME TO CANOPY AND DRILL HOLES S se ATTACH WITH 1 4 20 NUTS AND BOLTS IF CEILING WITH DOWN LIGHTS PROVIDED HOLES WILL BE PREDRILLED FOR CEILING BRACKETS SLIDE POYGAL DIFFUSER PANELS INTO FRAME 4 41 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 00 Cab Grounding Passenger safety demands that the elevator and car structures be firmly grounded MCE pro vides grounding straps as required one to install from a car rope shackle to the hitch plate Please refer to Shackle Grounding on page 3 30 one to ground the machine if required and one to install between the car and the platform stile Figure 4 44 Car Grounding Strap Installation 1 4 x 20 bolt 1 4 flat washer L Ground strap 1 4 x 20 hardware 1 4 flat lock washers amp nut Field drill stile J wall panel Position ground strap to prevent potential damage during car movement Remove the paint from the stile around the hole drilled to attach the strap to allowa proper ground path 4 42 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Cab Interiors Cab Assembly Standard cab interiors are vertical horizontal or vertical horizontal plastic laminate panels with stainless reveals and base as agreed upon If desired MCE
140. ON beeen Ka Sod DECR ERE CREE CIR ECRIRE SE C ERR 6 18 Runby and 6 18 Pove o ie Gee XE TERR EE 6 18 Overspeed Governor 6 39 Governor Technical Drawings 6 39 KOS T SOS ETT ee ee gt 6 43 EXORDIO 6 43 Guide Mounted 6 43 6 43 Peed UGS gb a ok XA 6 44 Car and Counterweight Buffers 6 44 FG L QT 6 44 II DUE K u HERR TIERE TEACHER ROSE EE EE RES ERR 6 44 laici iss _ _ ___ 6 44 a _ ___ 6 45 dor Y RR IEEE 6 50 Examinations and Maintenance 6 50 lunii 6 50 6 50 FOR oo 6 50 wr PCT 6 50 he _ _ __ 6 50 a4 E2439 gt _ 6 51 DROPS ad RE ROHEYHORIUER 6 51 Lubrication 475 478 522 525 ACPM Machines
141. OR LOCATION OF REVEAL REVEAL MADE WIDER THAN AREA BETWEEN FINISHED WALL PANELS Figure 4 41 Interior Panel Attachment 222 INTERIOR PANELS ARE MARKED ON BACK SIDE FOR PROPER PLACEMENT NUMBERING BEGINS ON LEFT SIDE LIKE THE SHELL PANELS gt lt oS 5 SLIDE WALL PANELS ONTO MOUNTED CLIPS SLIDE HORIZONTALLY TO DISTANCE REQUIRED FOR REVEAL SPACING MCE STANDARD IS 1 REVEAL BETWEEN PANELS EXCEPT AT CORNERS CORNER DISTANCES MEASURE 1 3 4 FROM WALL IF DESIRED A SCREW MAY BE DRILLED INTO SHELL JUST ABOVE PANEL TO SECURE PANEL FROM BEING LIFTED OFF 222 KR gt Sy 55 NN WSN lt gt NN NS NSS NS lt C A AAA AA AA AQ AA AA 2222222 K AAA AAA O O Q wR 494996 4 39 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Entrances Car and Positioning System Figure 4 42 Handrail Attachment CAB SHELL MARKING AND MARKING IS EXAMPLE ONLY INTERIOR PANEL MARKING CORRECT MARKING FOR PROJECT FOR ASSEMBLY START FROM WILL BE SHIPPED WITH PLAN VIEW LEFT END SIDE OF PROJECT INTERIOR PANEL 3 BACK WALL SHELL PANEL 3 CORNER SHELL PANEL 4 BACK WALL
142. PES THAT SET MUST BE REPLACED 8 6 3 2 5 The tension of the new replacement rope shall be checked and adjusted as necessary at semi monthly intervals over a period of not less than two months after installation If proper equalization of rope tension cannot be maintained after 6 months the entire set of hoist ropes shall be replaced REPLACEMENT ROPES MUST UTILIZE THE SAME FASTENING AS OTHER ROPES IN THE SET 8 6 3 2 6 The replacement rope shall be provided with the same type of suspension rope fastening used with the other ropes WHEN REPLACING ROPES OTHER THAN GOVERNOR ROPES ALL ROPES MUST BE NEW FROM THE SAME MANUFACTURER SAME MATERIAL GRADE CONSTRUCTION AND DIAMETER AS THE ORIGINAL SET DATA TAGS MUST BE CREATED 8 6 3 3 Replacement of Ropes Other Than Governor Ropes 8 6 3 3 1 Replacement of all ropes except governor ropes see 8 6 3 4 shall conform to the following a Replacement ropes shall be as specified by the original equipment manufacturer or be at least equivalent in strength weight and design b Ropes that been previously used in another installation shall not be reused c When replacing suspension compensating and card or drum counterweight ropes all ropes in a set shall be replaced except as permitted by 8 0 3 2 Suspension Rope Information d The ropes in a set shall be new all from the same manufacturer and of the same material grade construction and di
143. S WILL BE ABLE TO MEET NEW CONDITIONS 8 7 2 21 Suspension Ropes and Their Connections 8 7 2 21 1 Change in Ropes Where the material grade number or diameter of ropes is changed the new ropes and their fastenings shall conform to 2 20 When existing sheaves are retained using ropes different from those originally specified the original elevator man ufacturer or a licensed professional engineer shall certify the sheave material to be satisfactory for the revised application IF WIRE BREAKS ARE FOUND IN SUSPENSION AND COMPENSATION ROPES OR IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ROPE REMOVAL CRITERIA DETAILED BELOW ARE ATTAINED THEY SHOULD BE REPLACED cc Wire Suspension and Compensating Ropes Item 3 23 1 Wire suspension and compensating ropes shall be replaced a if the broken wires are equally distributed among the strands when the number of broken wires per rope lay in the worst section of the rope exceeds the values shown in column A of Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 1 or b if the distribution of broken wires is unequal and broken wires predominated in one or two strands when the number of broken wires per rope lay in the worst section of the rope exceeds the values shown in column B of Table 8 11 2 1 3 1 or c if four or five wires side by side are broken across the crown of any strand when the number of broken wires per rope lay in the worst section of MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinet
144. SME A17 1 code Stopping force exerted equally on both sides of each guide rail Simple mounting under plank channels spaced for 6 7 amp 8 stile members Adapter plates available for other stile widths All operating linkage is adjustable and located under the car for easy installation inspection and maintenance from elevator pit e Car safety switch operated by linkage under the car manually reset for maximum safety Arranged for mounting guide shoes of any type e Dusttight watertight and explosionproof switches available at an additional charge Shoe assemblies 371 and 381 will mount to 540 safety without needing adapter plates All other shoes require adapter plates MODEL SHIP WEIGHT 1759 MAXIMUM LOAD CAR CAPACITY COMPENSATION 20 000 LBS 15 000 Lbs IN WISC amp MAXIMUM CAR SPEED 150 100 EPM IN PA MAXIMUM TRIPPING SPEED 210 EPM RAIL SIZE 8 11 12 15 18 5 amp 22 5 Lbs NOTE THIS MODEL MEETS ASME CODE A17 1 REQUIREMENTS IT I5 NOT APPROVED IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA When Ordering Safeties Please Specify the Following Car Speed Face to Face of Guide Rails Rail Size Governor Location Stile Size Type of Guide Shoes to be Used 6 5 MeE _ Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 540 Instantaneous Safety 1 After bolting safety blocks to underside of car sling bottom channel center safety
145. T HEADER ANGLE 5 16 LOCK WASHER HEADER ANGLE 10 X 1 2 SHEET METAL SCREW WALL CLIP 10 X 5 8 FLAT HEAD WOOD SCREW FLOOR ANGLE CAB STEADIER UNITS SUPPLIED WITH PACKAGED HARDWARE CANOPY BACK SECTION CANOPY FRONT SECTION Z FRONT RETURN STRIKE JAMB SHELL PANEL CORNER SHELL PANEL CANOPY Roof sections of cab FRONT RETURN Front panel with cutout for car operating panel STRIKE JAMB Vertical structure against which door closes SHELL PANEL Wall panel section Standardized size CORNER SHELL PANEL Cab wall corner Sized as needed per car TRANSOM Cab front top horizontal structure provides mounting shelf for door angle 4 30 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Figure 4 28 Miscellaneous Exterior Components FAN CANOPY LOCK CANOPY ELECTRIC LOCK DOOR OPERATOR SUPPORT ANGLES HEADER PLATE ANGLE Cab Assembly CAB STEADIER Your equipment may be different always follow the installation drawings 4 31 MeE Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 000 Figure 4 29 Miscellaneous Interior Components VERTICAL REVEALS B FLUORESCENT LIGHT STRIP FAN GRILLE HANDRAIL WITH SPACERS NOTCHED STANDARD CORNER FOR TRANSOM WALL CLIP HORIZONTAL REVEAL WALL PANEL FRONT AND BACK VIEW 4 32 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Figure 4 30 Standard Ceiling Frame Components Note Cei
146. The seizing shall be at a distance from the end of the rope equal to the length of the tapered portion of the socket plus the length of the portion of the rope to be turned in A WRITTEN MAINTENANCE CONTROL PROGRAM MUST BE ESTABLISHED AND RIGIDLY FOLLOWED TO INSURE THAT ALL INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT REMAINS IN COMPLIANCE Section 8 6 Maintenance Repair and Replacement 8 6 1 2 General Maintenance Requirements Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0208 p Phone US 1 706 235 6315 e Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 e info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com 6 19 Maintenance BRUGG MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company ASME RULES amp GUIDELINES 8 6 1 2 1 A written Maintenance Control Program shall be in place to maintain the equipment in compliance with the requirements of 8 6 a The Maintenance Control Program shall consist of but not be limited to 1 examinations maintenance and tests of equipment at scheduled intervals in order to ensure that the installation conforms to the requirements of 8 6 The maintenance procedures and intervals shall be based on a equipment age condition and accumulated wear b design an
147. USH338 5 16 3 8 in 8 0 10 0 mm 3 8 ISCLAIICN BUSHNG FAS SPG38 5 16 3 8 8 0 10 0 mm 4 7 8 in 124 mm 1 1 4 in 32 mm 11 16 in 175 mm 3 8ISQLATICN SPRING FASISA 12 7 16 1 2 in 10 0 12 7 mm 6 1 8 in 156 mm 1 7 8 in 48 mm 1 in 25 4 mm 1 2 ISCLAICNASSEVBLY RAG BUSH 12 7 16 1 2 in 10 0 12 7 mm 1 2 ISQLATION BUSH WASHER PAS ISOBUSH 12 7 16 1 2 in 10 0 12 7 mm NA NA NA 1 2 ISCLATION BUSHNG FASSFG42 7 16 1 2 in 10 0 12 7 mm 6 1 8 in 156 mm 1 7 8 in 48 mm 1 25 4 mm 1 2 ISA ATON SPRING FAS ISA58 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 mm 67 8 in 175 mm 2 7 16 in 62 mm 1 1 4in 32mm 5 8 ISCLATICNASSEVBLY RAG BUSH 58 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 mm NA NA NA 5 8 ISQLATION BUSH WASHER FAS ISCBUSH58 9 16 5 8 14 0 16 0 mm NA NA NA 5 8 BUSHNG FAS SPG58 9 16 5 8 in 14 0 16 0 mm 6 7 8 175 mm 2 7 16 in 62 mm 1 1 4 in 32 mm 5 8 ISCLATION SFRNG PASISA34 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0mm 7in 178 mm 3 11 32 85 mm 1 49 64 in 45 mm 3 4 ISCLATICNASSEVBLY FAS BUSH34 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm NA NA 3 4 ISCLATICN BUSH VASHR PA amp SCBUSH 3A 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0 mm NA NA NA 3 4 SCLATION BUSHNG PAG SPG34 11 16 3 4 in 17 5 19 0mm 178 mm 3 11 32 in 85 mm 1 49 64 45 mm 3 4 ISOLATION SPRING solation bushing spring assemblies include all components listed above They DO NOT include the w
148. UT OF SERVICE UNTIL ALL REPAIRS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED 8 6 1 2 2 Where a defective part directly affecting the safety of the operation is identified the equipment shall be taken out of service until the defective part has been adjusted repaired or replaced SPLICING IS NEVER AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE FOR LENGTHENING OR REPAIRING SUSPENSION GOVERNOR AND COMPENSATION ROPES 8 6 2 5 Repair of Ropes Suspension governor and compensating ropes shall not be lengthened or repaired by splicing see 8 7 2 21 IF A PART FEATURES REDUCED STRENGTH OR OFFERS DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS NOT EQUAL TO THE ORIGINAL TO BE REPLACED IT IS NOT TO BE USED 8 6 3 Replacements 8 6 3 1 Replacement Parts Replacements shall be made with parts of at least equivalent material strength and design EXCEPT IN AN INSTANCE WHERE A ROPE REVEALS DAMAGE PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING IF ONE ROPE FROM A SET EXHIBITS SIGNS OF WEAR OR DAMAGE THE ENTIRE SET MUST BE REPLACED 8 6 3 2 Replacement of a Single Suspension Rope If one rope of a set is worn or damaged and requires replacement the entire set of ropes shall be replaced except where one rope is damaged during installation or acceptance testing prior to be subjected to elevator service it shall be permissible to replace a single damaged rope with a new one provided that the requirements of 8 6 3 2 1 through 8 6 3 2 6 are met WHEN YOU REPLACE A HOIST ROPE RECOR
149. Wire Rope is notified in writing of the transfer and of the name and address of the new owner within fifteen 15 days after the date on which the transfer is made d Brugg Wire Rope s warranties shall not apply to any goods or parts thereof which have been subjected to any misuses neglect or accidental damage or which contain defects which are in any way attributable to improper installation or to alter ations or repairs made or performed by any person or entity not under the control of Brugg Wire Rope Further Brugg Wire Rope s warranties shall not apply to any goods or parts thereof which are obtained from manufacturers other than Brugg Wire Rope and resold by Brugg Wire Rope e THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN ARE BRUGG WIRE ROPE S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTIES FOR OR RELATING TO THE GOODS BRUGG WIRE ROPE NEITHER MAKES NOR ASSUMES ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY ANY WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE ANY WARRANTY THAT THE GOODS SHALL BE DELIVERED FREE OF THE RIGHTFUL CLAIM OF ANY THIRD PERSON BY WAY OF INFRINGEMENT OR THE LIKE OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY BRUGG WIRE ROPE NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY PERSON OR ENTITY TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY OR OBLIGATION IN CONNECTION WITH Manual 42 02 EPO2 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company CONTACT TERMS AND CONDITIONS THE SALE OR USE OF THE GOODS AND THERE ARE NO ORAL AGREEMENTS OR WARRANTIES
150. Y aq p nous ie 991 JO dy 01 1 1 Yea Jo ay WOJ 2 251 991 IeJ 991 Jo BY O 9 3X221 sjaaym ue epis u e3 SM3HDS DNPIOVH L WV 3415 Jad 67 sq 005 03 dn 91e1edo s 23uM J9 01 aU 6 SZ o1 Z 10 SAI OS 01 SZ uonisoduuoo u do u JO payi eds soy Y UDYM 5 paads uo 193eUuJounp Y 21045 56 aUeUaINAJOd 5 02513 Ie4 ay uo puey Aq aq ue ay pue 99UM APIS uo 6x sc O ZL 541 OS O1 SZ IIIA urod siu 1v LANYDO1 1IN3AWiSnrav 1VO1d 4 Y 7 1VO14 35v3u23q 9s1320 2 VO 4 3SV38UDNI 2 2 905 1VO14 lt ajqemoyle 7 days 01 49J9J sjgeuM peddinbe sapinb uone J2 SUI J 933ONI J BY JO 493122 ay u pue Z O 91 O 2 WOD al
151. a derating label for each machine shipped For ACPM machines the label is located on the power connection box Figure 2 10 Machine Derating Label 525 ACPM shown 2 10 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Overhead Installations Lubrication and Maintenance Machines require lubrication every 6 months or 3000 hours 500 and 800 series machines have two lubrication points 400 series machines have one Specified lubricant SKF LGEP2 475 sheave end bearing 0 75 oz 21 g 478 1 0 oz 27 g 522 525 sheave end 1 75 oz 55 g encoder end 0 50 oz 15 3 g 805 808 sheave end 1 75 oz 55 g encoder end 0 50 oz 15 3 g Please refer to Lubrication 475 478 522 525 ACPM Machines on page 6 52 A Caution Damage due to improper bearing lubrication is not covered by warranty If incompatible lubricants are mixed lubricant consistency will change and bearing damage due to harden ing or leakage can result If you have a question contact Imperial Electric Company at 330 734 3600 or an MCE representative at 916 463 9200 Hitch Plates Dead End The dead end hitch plate for the car is generally secured to a car hitch beam opposite the machine beams in the hoistway overhead The dead end hitch plate for the counterweight is generally secured to the machine beams Refer to the overhead drawings Also see Typical MRL Overhead Layout on page 2 4 2 11 iiia Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company
152. a feel for how the car will move The shorted motor windings should restrict speed to about ten feet per minute 6 Continue holding the BRAKE RELEASE buttons The camera view will give you a clear idea of car speed and direction 7 Whenthe door zone sign in the hoistway comes into view you may want to begin bump ing pressing and releasing the BRAKE RELEASE buttons for short durations to be cer tain you do not overshoot the floor 8 Movethe car until the horizontal bar on the rescue panel LCD screen is centered between the horizontal door zone bars on the hoistway sign 9 Thecaris now in the door zone at the indicated floor and the doors may be manually opened to release passengers 10 When rescue is complete close the doors and return the key switch to the NORMAL position The car will resume normal operation when commercial power is restored GOVERNOR RESCUE CONTROL PANEL g 4 NORM Re Mm PUSH BOTH TO RELEASE BRAKE VIA J AY RESCUE W 4 TADE w 4 BRAKE RELEASE 5 4 Manual 42 02 Elevator Packages PMAC Machine I nformation PMAC Machine Information To properly drive a PMAC machine the drive must know the absolute position of the rotor at all times in order to electrically commutate the field This information is captured by the encoder and sent to the drive through a serial link The encoder on the Imperial PMAC machines used by MCE is an EnDat H
153. adjustments in its lifetime due to the effects of constructional stretch Some believe that prestretching ropes during manufacture can reduce the frequency of number shortenings meaning less maintenance and offers certain handling advantages where the pit clearance is shallow and the overhead run by is limited However prestretching no matter how carefully administered can lead to a vital sacrifice in rope diameter In some cases this can even mean that a rope bears a diameter that measures only nominal before it has been applied to a machine Brugg manufactures non prestretched ropes bearing a pre engineered amount of stretch ranging from 6 8 in 152 4 mm 203 2 mm offering the perceived advantages of prestretched ropes without their potential shortcomings Rope Tensioning Immediately upon initial installation and approximately three months after Brugg recommends checking rope tensioning with a suitable device Simply setting the rope tension and adjusting the spring or buffer tension by hand is insufficient as the manufacturer tolerances on springs and buffers are not precisely controlled For this Brugg has developed RPM Rope Performance Measurement an economical precise and easy to use device offering professionals the advantages of precise tensioning Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235
154. ag see 2 20 2 2 j if provided 8 6 4 1 3 Equal tension shall be maintained between individual ropes in each set When suspension rope tension is checked or adjusted an anti rotation device conforming to the requirements of 2 20 9 8 shall be permitted GOVERNOR ROPES MUST BE KEPT CLEAN 8 6 4 2 Governor Wire Ropes 8 6 4 2 1 The ropes shall be kept clean ANY LUBRICANT FOUND ON A GOVERNOR ROPE SHOULD BE REMOVED COMPLETED OR THE GOVERNOR ROPE ITSELF MUST BE REPLACED 8 6 4 2 Governor Wire Ropes 8 6 4 2 2 Governor ropes shall not be lubricated after installation If lubricants have been applied to governor ropes they shall be replaced or the lubricant removed and the governor and safety shall be tested as specified in 8 11 2 3 2 b and 8 11 2 2 2 Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0208 e Phone US 1 706 235 6315 e Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 e info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com 6 21 Maintenance 6 22 BRUGG WHEN EXISTING SHEAVES ARE TO BE USED WITH ROPES DIFFERENT FROM THOSE ORIGINALLY SPECIFIED EITHER THE ORIGINAL ELEVATOR MANUFACTURER OR A LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER MUST CERTIFY THAT THOSE SHEAVE
155. allation Overhead Machine beams machine associated hardware Rail hardware Rails fishplates rail brackets pit channels hardware Sling amp Hoistway Buffers sling and platform counterweight assembly counterweight fill ers governor ropes rope shackles Electrical Traveler cable hoistway cable hoistway switches rescue equipment controller isolation transformer hanging and mounting hardware Cabs and fixtures Cab components entrances fixtures Supporting documentation and data tags Shipment Verification With each shipment a contents list will be provided Verify and note on the lists the complete ness of the order Contact the shipping company and MCE immediately upon discovering any shortage or incorrect component Motion Control Engineering 916 463 9200 voice 916 463 9201 fax 11380 White Rock Road Rancho Cordova CA 95742 1 2 Manual 42 02 EP01 MCE Elevator Packages Supporting Documentation Supporting Documentation 42 02 01 Elevator Installation amp Maintenance Manual This manual Will be delivered with or before first package Drawings package Site layout mechanical and assembly drawings Will be delivered with first package or as scheduled Job Prints Electrical connections for controller and all peripherals Will be delivered with controller Controller Manual Electrical installation and connection instructions for controller Phys ical and electrical install inst
156. ameter e Data tags conforming to 2 20 2 2 shall be applied f Suspension car and drum counterweight rope fastenings shall conform to 2 20 9 THE SAME QUALITY GUIDELINES FOLLOWED WHILE REPLACING OTHER ELEVATOR ROPES SHALL BE USED WHEN REPLACING GOVERNOR OR SAFETY ROPES 8 6 3 4 Replacement of Governor or Safety Rope 8 6 3 4 1 Governor shall be of the same size material and construction as the rope specified by the governor manufacturer except that a rope of the same size but of different material or construction shall be permitted to be installed in conformance with 8 7 2 19 NEVER REPLACE ONLY ONE BELT OR CHAIN FROM A SET SHOWING SIGNS OF DAMAGE 8 6 3 5 Belts and Chains If one belt or chain is stretched beyond that specified by manufacturer s recommendation or is damaged so as to require replacement the entire set shall be replaced Sprockets and toothed sheaves shall also be replaced if worn beyond that specified in the manufacturer s recommendations SUSPENSION AND COMPENSATION ROPES SHALL BE KEPT CLEAN WELL LUBRICATED AND PROPERLY TENSIONED 8 6 4 1 Suspension and Compensation Wire ropes 8 6 4 1 1 Suspension and compensating ropes shall be kept lubricated and clean so they can be visually inspected 8 6 4 1 2 Precautions shall be taken in lubricating suspension wire ropes to prevent the loss of traction Lubrication shall be in accordance with instructions on the rope data t
157. ammed time The self test will not disturb the normal operation of the elevator The PLC has four relay contact outputs Two are used for ger and battery load control the other two are for battery fault and charger fault If a battery or charger fault occurs a signal is sent to the controller to stop the car at the next landing and take it out of service With the controller powered verify that the DC OK LED on the power supply next to the PLC is illuminated Verify the PLC screen displays RUN the day of the week and the time For example FR10 24 indicates Friday at 10 24 Default Language The default display language is English Five other choices are available Press OK to open the Menu screen Press the Down arrow until Language is highlighted Press OK to display the current language English Press Up and or Down arrows to highlight a different language Press OK to display a confirmation message Press OK again to set the new language for the display PWN P Date and Time 1 Press OK to open the Menu screen 2 Pressthe Down arrow until Set Clock is highlighted 3 Press OK to display current settings Right digit of date will be highlighted and ing Use Left Right arrows to move the cursor Use Up Down arrows to change value Use OK to change from highlighted to flashing ready to change cursor Press again to display the confirmation message when ready to sa
158. an the grease fitting and drain plug Using 17mm socket remove the drain plug 2 Lubricate the top fitting with SKF LGEP2 grease sheave end 1 75 oz 55 g encoder end 0 50 oz 15 3 g Caution Do not overfill bearing reservoir by pumping grease until it comes out the drain This will cause permanent bearing damage Use only the recommended amount of lubricant 3 Replacethe drain plug 4 Cleanlubrication and drain points 6 53 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Doors and Door Operator Doors Visually examine doors for broken bent or sprung members Cycle doors to verify smooth operation Check that sill guide tracks and gibs are in place and not excessively worn Clean sill grooves Lubricate moving parts as required Door Closing Force Proper closing force exerted in various conditions Bringthe car to a floor Start closing the doors but block them with an appropriate object between 1 3 and 2 3 of normal travel nsert a force measuring device and remove the blocking object Gently back off on the device until the doors just start to move This is the point of measurement Normal closing force cannot exceed 30 Ibsf 133 44 N Verify door operator data plate attached to car crosshead or door power operator Measuring Door Closing Force To measure door closing force 1 Park the car at a floor 2 Begin to close the doors Allow them to close
159. and I SO Transformer The elevator controller is generally installed in a control room or closet Install the controller as shown in the MCE construction drawings and the controller job prints The cables from the drive to the machine should be kept as short as possible A special VFD cable is provided with every Freedom Elevator If the cable exceeds forty feet 12 meters in length refer to the drive manual to see if any special filtering will be required MCE VFD engineered shielded cable is connected inside the controller as shown below Once the O D of the cable is determined MCE can advise you as to conduit size and bend radius Figure 3 43 Motor Cable Connections Inside Controller AC Drive Ground 4 Controller 1 2 3 UV W to drive Hoist Motor E Ground Output Ground Input Ground Controller Ground Motor ground cable Motor Contactor Building Ground Controller backplane ground 1 2 3 V W to contactor C M Cable bundle shield otor cable bundle entry to controller Motor cable bundle ground cable green connects to the ground on the drive Cable bundle shield connects to nearest ground on the controller backplane Cable bundle shield must be trimmed back to insulation left unconnected at motor end Cable Routing High voltage cables and encoder cables must be run in separate conduit from one another to prevent electrical noise f
160. ar 4 Washer Lock 3 1 5133 50 4 Ring Truarc A 9 Plate Data w pins ships loose Bushing Oilite Spacer 2 5 8 540 20 540 21 3 UJ W NI N N 6 Ke Motion Control Engineering 6 10 MeE A Kinetek Company FLEXIBLE GUIDE CLAMP SAFETY The Hollister Whitney Type B Flexible Guide Clamp Safety is Superior in Construction and Offers Many Important Features Designed in compliance with all requirements of ASME A17 1 code Stopping force automatically exerted equally on both sides of each guide rail and readily adjustable through compression spring on each safety block Full swivel of rail grips provides full and uniform contact on all rail faces when safety is actuated Simple mounting under plank channels spaced for stile members of any size All operating linkage is adjustable and located under the car for easy installation inspection and maintenance from elevator pit Car safety switch operated by linkage under the car and automatically resets Arranged for mounting guide shoes of any type Dusttight watertight and explosionproof switches available at an additional charge All H W car guide shoes except 377 bolt directly to 480 safety Other manufac turer s shoes may require adapter plates 1 I J i RAIL WIDTH 3 8 MODEL SHIP WEIGHT 2002 x 480 ___ 48 48 MAXIMU
161. b Drawings Elevator Entrance Drawings Elevator Fixture Drawings Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Contents Section 1 Package Description amp Site Readiness IA ees AD oh bee oe eo Edad SEP redd PG E 1 1 Ji TID REOR GRE eR RACE C C 1 2 Hardware Packages 6 cs 5 660666666 66 4 46566040 06 EG EERYENE REC E S3 X EROR 1 2 asesupaweuxe r 1 2 Supporting Documentation 1 3 Optional Equipment E ed ed CR COR OOH AR ETM 1 4 Hoistway Qualification 1 5 1 5 Goes ss _________ _ 1 7 Storage CondilionS u v RE ACC 1 9 Safety and Code Compliance 1 9 DIEN Loos rd PRU _4 _ _ pa 1 9 Section 2 Overhead and Rails DIIS 2 1 sucre DVOervIGM 2 2 Overhead Installations iisxax X wA X WEGa x 5 ES 2 4 MRL Machine Bearing and Hitch Beams 2 5 HE Edd PRA dco EU ORAE E E Edd cd E brR 2 6 Aligning an Eye 5 6 2 7 Poring PIDEN aus3 Kxdus did 44i gt 2 7 Machine Positioning
162. ble isolators are provided for use between the machine plate and the machine beam plates Figure 2 7 Expanded View of Isolation Structure This drawing is for general reference Always follow the approved Con struction drawing for your installation since there is variation from job to job depending upon site require ments i 4 x UPPER ISOLATOR BEARING PLATE 1 8 x ISOLATION TUBE BUSHING 2 x ISOLATION PAD A _ Ax ISOLATION PAD C 27 MACHINE PLATE MACHINE SUPPORT CHANNELS 7 2 x ISOLATION PAD B E Pd 2 X LOWER ISOLATOR BEARING PLATE Bonding The isolated machine and machine plate structure requires that a bonding strap be installed This bonding strap has been factory installed and must be in place prior to applying power to the machine or brake if removed for any reason Figure 2 8 Bonding Strap 2 8 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Overhead Installations Hardware As shipped from MCE the machine plate and machine isolation pads are attached to the machine beams using Grade 8 bolts flat washers and standard double nuts Once machine beam construction is complete and the machine is mounted snug the first nut up against the flat washer snug the second nut up to lock the first in place and insert the provided cotter key through the hole in the bolt Bend the cotter key ends to keep it in place Figure 2 9 Machine Plate Mounting w
163. ctual diameter is reduced below the value shown in Table 9 11 2 1 3 Table 6 5 5 Table 8 11 2 1 3 3 Maximum Reduced Nominal Size in Diameter in 1 25 4 mm 15 16 23 8 mm Maintenance Rope should be inspected on a regular basis 6 16 1 2 10 11 Review drive and car sheaves and verify they are accurately aligned Be sure to perform a termination tie down Isolation of sockets to prevent spinning out Verify there are no missing or broken isolation springs on the shackles Verify that rope identification tags are present and all information is easily readable and complete Lubrication is ABSOLUTELY CRITICAL Follow manufacturer guidelines and apply a generous amount of lubrication Touch a rope with your finger You should see a smudge and feel oil If not the ropes are ready for lubrication Be sure to periodically test tension equalization and adjust hoist ropes correspondingly This requires an accurate tool Whichever tool you choose follow the manufacturer s instructions carefully Please refer to RPM directions included with OEM inclusions referenced on page 5 13 Increased or increasing car motion resistance can be a sure sign of mechanical prob lems such as bad roller guides Excessive car vibrations can be caused by either electrical drive systems or mechanical problems in system operation Any hoistway impediment or obstruction tha
164. d inherent quality of the equipment usage d environmental conditions e improved technology f the manufacturer s recommendations for any SIL rated devices or circuits 2 cleaning lubricating and adjusting applicable components at regular intervals and repairing or replacing all worn or defective components where necessary to maintain the installation in compliance with the requirements of 8 6 b The instructions for locating the Maintenance Control Program shall be provided in or on the controller along with instructions on how to report any corrective action that might be necessary to the responsible party c The maintenance records shall be required by 8 6 1 4 shall be kept at a central location d The Maintenance Control Program shall be accessible to the elevator personnel and shall document compliance with 8 6 e Procedures for tests periodic inspections maintenance replacements adjustments and repairs for all SIL rated E E PES electrical protective devices and circuits shall be incorporated into and made part of the Maintenance Control Program See 2 26 4 3 2 2 26 9 4 b 2 26 9 5 1 b and 2 26 9 6 1 b f Where unique or product specific procedures or methods are required to inspect or test equipment such procedures or methods shall be included in the Maintenance Control Program WHENEVER A DEFECTIVE PART AFFECTING AN OPERATION S SAFETY IS IDENTIFIED SUCH EQUIPMENT MUST BE TAKEN O
165. d the tension sheave weight The tension sheave weight maintains adequate rope tension between sheave and governor The overspeed governor may be mounted in the top of the hoistway for MRL applications or in a machine room Figure 3 30 Governor Components Governor HW207 RS MRL DI 21 EN Rack style governor tension weight A sin gle arm style tension sheave is also used LI Machine room applications use the HW 205 governor Appearance is much the same but remote set reset is not provided 3 33 a WS Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Overspeed Governor Mounting There is an identifying label on the overspeed governor Check that the label information meets requirements for the job If not do not install the unit Contact your MCE project manager immediately for replacement In the Overhead MRL If the MCE elevator package is for a machine room less installation a pre drilled base plate is provided on the machine beams If hoistway construction does not allow this arrangement the governor may be mounted lower in the hoistway using alternate mounting methods See the MCE construction drawings The mounting holes on the overspeed governor base plate are slotted to provide some lateral adjustment For now secure the unit lightly Once the tension sheave is mounted in the pit the two sheaves can be aligned for plumb and then tightened securely The rope must also align
166. d when conditions allow Conduct this test as directed in the manual for the elevator controller Additionally 1 Checkthe level of the platform As before if any racking is detected you will need to readjust the safeties 2 Checkslide distance See ASME CSA code for guidance in properly measuring slide distances If slide distance is not correct Carefully and equally adjust spring tension in small increments using adjusting bolts D Tighten to shorten slide loosen to lengthen slide Note that each adjusting bolt has a locking nut at its base that must be loosened to adjust the bolt When adjustment is complete and the locking nuts of the adjusting bolts D have been secured make certain that the distance between the underside of the adjustment bolt D heads and the top of the locking nuts are equal Ensures adjustment is equal for all three adjusting bolts Table 3 5 Flexible Guide Clamp Safeties Slide Distances Maximum Tripping Minimum Stopping Maximum Stopping Slide distances can vary depending on final cab weight guide rail composition and safety jaw variables Field adjustment may well be necessary When using the table above subtract the length of the safety shoe from the measured slide mark to determine the actual slide distance Use the average of the four 4 slide marks to record the slide distance Type A Safeties safeties are only used on low speed cars Install Type safeties as de
167. ded bearing lubricant for this motor The use of any other grease is the sole responsibility of the user and may void the warranty 475 478 475 and 478 machine sheave end bearings require lubrication The encoder end bearingis per manently sealed and does not require lubrication Figure 7 Lube Point Locations on Front of Machine Drain plug at this location 1 Usinga 12mm internal hex wrench remove the plugs covering the lubrication points 2 Rotatethe machine until the lubrication fitting is at 12 and the drain fitting at 6 o clock vertically aligned Remove the motor from service Clean grease fitting and drain plug areas 3 Usingan 11mm deep socket remove the drain fitting from the bottom access point 4 Lubricate the top fitting with SKF LGEP2 grease 475 0 75 oz 21g 478 1 0 oz 270 A Caution Do not overfill bearing reservoir by pumping grease until it comes out the drain This will cause permanent bearing damage Use only the recommended amount of lubricant 5 Replacethe drain fitting 6 Clean lubrication and drain points Re insert plugs 6 52 Manual 42 02 EPO2 Maintenance Lubrication 475 478 522 525 ACPM Machines 922 525 500 series machine sheave and encoder end bearings both require lubrication Figure 8 500 Series Lubrication Points age mr iyd 2 T Prix Y Front and or Rear 1 Remove the motor from service Cle
168. ded with a counterweight seismic movement detec tor The detector consists of a light steel cable that runs from an insulated point of connection through the center of the eyelet of a grounded eye bolt attached to the counterweight frame and finishes at a second insulated point of connection The insulated connection points are mounted on the counterweight guide rail one above counterweight travel the other below The steel cable is connected to a 24V signal from the elevator controller If the counterweight moves suf ficiently that the eyelet of the grounded bolt shorts the cable travelling through it the controller voltage is pulled low and the controller senses the counterweight movement Two of these strings are used one for each vertical stile of the counterweight frame If a ring and string seismic detector is used refer to the MCE construction drawings for physical mounting infor mation and to the elevator controller manual for electrical connections The universal rail mounting brackets shown below are shipped along with an OEM kit Please use the universal brackets and dispose of the brackets shipped with the OEM kit Figure 3 18 Counterweight Seismic Movement Detector Controller 24V Counterweight rail Counterweight Insulated mount 2 places 3 19 TCR Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Counterweight Fillers Counterweights fillers are standard steel plate They are inse
169. des e 01 ssaJis Jepun pajoedsut 06001 1 pue 1 JO Buipeay E30 uuu G0 59490 200 01 punoJB uoisioaJd sJa ou 029113 51006 e j 1u9 aud Jey sonsugjoeJeuo uBiu sj220M 02913 euinueD Auo pue Ayjenb epu 01 jenuesse sonsuoejoeJeuo y auaJdoau 20614 Aug ujoouis e 01 1 1 K snouoBu pue pepunoduioo Ajjeioads AGIND YATION YVINdOd LISON YNO g 1380lA JHL JGVIN 3AVH INTIVA DNIGNVWISLNO ISN 30 3573 39NVH NOlIVOr1ddV V 39vx9vd TIVISNI OI ASV3 LOWdINOO V NI 39NVIWHOHH3d IVNOILd3DOX3 593550 AGING H3TIOH q T3GO A 3H S AULSNGNI 99IAI8S 01 sainssaid pue 4 2 USUI peeds suni BISA S JLN p u luBn Ajainoas sinu Jo pue soq 1841 ans aq 01 99U2 saoue Jeajo 1510 01 peeds uonoadsur umop pue dn ul e eu siueunsnfpe JOY sainssaJd ajqemoye 10 dais 01 upgu1 in jod ym p ddinb 3 JON inss id Jo YGZ 0121 54 06 0 az
170. e J9 O epis hun sinu bunsnfpe opis WIN 5 jaayM We epis 1snfpy LAN ONILSNFAV 3415 Maids moy 210 271 gt p nous 1nq 01 8 Mou se uu deb siu uonnejepinb ydea Joy g 4915 995 queujeunseauu deb pue aunssaid Bde 1242 eg N31HDI L 1n N 201A382S DNILSQfQV N puey Aq 991 PIAS SeJnssaJd 10 LZ days 01 SjgauM ueul n jod peddinbe sepin6 J eoNsunssaJd Jo cz o1 ZL SQ OS Sz sjuasaidad siu DU UO Z 0 91 z ipesseduuoo sI eun qissod aq JIA 31 paysn pe u doid pun Mads Gunsnfpe qnu y WNL 99055344 dsvduodd 3 40554 3SV3HDNI 995 Au N DNILSQfQV 80H lr ee y S 29uM J9 OJ ade BY Jo aJnssaJd y M S y Jo 3useunsn py our 1nu BY uae eq gt K jedoud jueunsn pe siy e IuM 991
171. e 4 35 Transom Attachment ATTACH TRANSOM TO SIDE WALL PANELS JAMB STRIKE AND FRONT RETURN USING SUPPLIED 1 4 20 NUTS AND BOLTS SQUARE CAB AND ATTACH SHELL PANEL FLOOR ANGLES TO PLATFORM USING SUPPLIED WOOD SCREWS 4 36 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Figure 4 36 Back Canopy Attachment PLACE BACK CANOPY SECTION ON SIDE AND BACK WALL INSERT 1 4 20 BOLTS THROUGH SLOTS OF CANOPY AND HOLES ON TOP ANGLE OF WALL PANELS PLACE ADEQUATE NUMBER OF BOLTS NO LESS THAN 4 ATTACH NUTS BUT DO NOT TIGHTEN SLIP FRONT CANOPY SECTION UNDER ANGLE OF BACK CANOPY ATTACH TO BACK CANOPY SECTION BY ALIGNING HOLES ON FLANGE AND ANGLE OF CANOPY SECTIONS ATTACH USING 1 4 20 BOLTS AND NUTS MAKE SURE CANOPY SECTIONS ALIGN WITH SHELL TOP ANGLES AND TRANSOM ANGLE THERE MAY BE SOME VARIANCE IN DEPTH APPLY 1 4 20 BOLTS IN SLOTS NOT ALL SLOTS WILL ALIGN AND TIGHTEN NUTS TO SECURE CABS HAVE BEEN STOOD UP PRIOR TO SHIPMENT AND IF MORE ATTACHMENT LOCATIONS ARE REQUIRED THEY WILL BE PREDRILLED BEFORE TAKE DOWN IF SHELL 15 LONGER AND REQUIRES MULTIPLE CANOPY SECTIONS IT 15 RECOMMENED THAT YOU FOLLOW THESE PROCEDURES FOR ATTACHMENT 4 37 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Entrances Car and Positioning System Figure 4 38 Cab Top Items ATTACH CAB STEADIER TO CAB SO THE THREE ANGLES ENCOMPASS STILE ATTACH ESCAPE HATCH LOCK TO PREDRILLED PEDESTAL AND ANGLE STRI
172. e of undersized sheaves improper sheave maintenance aggressive groove types multiple sheave configurations reverse bends and poor lubrication or improper rope tensioning technique adversely affects bending stresses leading to faster rope fatigue Combinations of these factors will have a multiplicative effect negatively impacting on fatigue performance Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0208 6 25 Maintenance 6 26 BRUGG MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company GLOSSARY OF TERMS Filler Wire Construction wire construction is designed to offer better resistance to bending fatigue We recommend that filler wire constructions be favored when a task requires the use of ropes of 6 to 9 outer strands with diameters larger than 5 8 in 16 mm because of filler wire s inherent advantages in flexibility However a disadvantage of this strand construction is in its vulnerability to geometry distortion especially when the filler wire itself is not of nominal diameter Groove Geometries rope s diameter must fit a sheave s groove radius correctly If the grooves in the drive sheave aka f
173. ecified in the job requirements and may be included in the Freedom package or pro vided by others Install car fixtures as shown in the drawings package Wire fixtures as shown in the controller job prints 4 47 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 0000 MRL Rescue Assist System This instruction provides installation and operating instructions for the MCE Rescue Assist Sys tem The manual rescue unit is designed for use with MRL installations where a means is required to electrically lift machine brakes and provide video feedback that will allow a techni cian to safely drift the elevator car to a landing from outside the hoistway in the absence of com mercial electrical power Additional elements of the rescue system meet code requirements that the rescue system battery be monitored at all times so that the elevator may be stopped at the next landing should the battery drop below required charge during normal elevator operation Figure 4 50 Rescue Assist System Rescue Panel mounted in elevator controller Video Camera Controller Control Room Components Rescue panel Battery charger and inverter Floor signs Monitor Test Unit Hoistway Components Infrared video camera Floor signs 4 48 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages MRL Rescue Assist System Installation Installation consists of Connectingthe battery and the charger
174. eck rope condition Check rope is clean and dry Check overspeed switches Check remote reset function Roller Guides Lubricate Check alignment and clearances Check for signs of wear Check securely fastened Check blade wheel traction Manual 42 02 EPO2 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company MRL Maintenance Detailed Checklist Locking Bolt Clean e Lubricate e Check switch e Check securely fastened I nspection Station Clean Check switch operation Check light Check car top outlet Rails Check condition Check alignment Check fastenings Hoist Machine Clean Check lubrication Check sheave condition Check rope condition Examine Brake Check lining Check adjustment ubricate pivot points Check brake switches e Check brake lift drop drag Check emergency shoe operation Positioning System Clean Lubricate Check securely fastened Flgo Check tape condition Check sensor tape alignment iControl Check encoding wheel aligament Check encoding wheel tension Check door leveling magnets Check sensor to magnet clearances 6 65 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Door Operator Clean Lubricate Check belts and or chains Check linkages Check switches Check securely fastened Rescue System Check camera mount Clea
175. edge socket Los montajes de aislamiento de resorte y manguito comprenden todos los componentes arriba mencionados NO incluyen el casquillo acu ado NEN m BRUGG OU 3 rn r Tt rr F rr s ss si Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com 6 34 Manual 42 02 EP02 MRL Maintenance Suspension Rope I nformation BRUGG WEDGE SOCKETS CASQUILLOS ACUNADOS Brugg Wire Rope LLC The most common end termination method in hoist rope installation uses a wedge socket This method utilizes a specially constructed socket in which a rope is looped inside and then is secured with the appropriate wedge When used in tandem both components complete a unique internal configuration that becomes tight when a load is applied to the finished connection Care must be taken to ensure that the wedge is not reversed in the socket This could lead to reduced attachment efficiency or breakage When performed properly installation and shortening can be performed quickly and efficiently Each Brugg wedge socket consists of the socket rod wedge 2 nuts 1 washer 1 cotter pin and 2 retaining clips Brugg Wire Rope wedge sockets are tested with 8
176. edge socket body leaving a minimal amount of loop to install the wedge insert Be sure that the rope is placed correctly into the body of the socket as shown in the diagram or it will not align correctly STEP 2 Install the wedge insert Place the wedge into the loop Wedge inserts come marked and color coded so only the correct size can be used for the desired rope diameter i e 3 8 in wedge insert for a 3 8 in rope STEP 3 Pull on the loose rope Pull down on the hoist rope with one hand to maintain tautness and pull up on the loose end quickly The loop will gradually tighten drawing the wedge within STEP 4 Firmly seat the wedge within The wedge will firmly nestle within the socket body Now let the weight of the car and counterweight rest on the ropes themselves The rope and wedge insert should rise about 1in 2 54 mm to the final set under load when properly seated Cut surplus amounts of rope but retain approximately 6 in 15 24 cm of rope to create a tail section STEP 5 Install retaining clips Attach a minimum of two retaining clips to fasten the dead end extra rope emerging from the socket body to the load bearing end of the rope Place the first clip a maximum of four times the rope s diameter above the socket and another within eight times the rope s diameter above the first clip Clips are used to retain the wedge and prevent rope slippage should the load be removed Slac
177. eidenhain encoder It is necessary to learn the encoder position If you have any problem with this procedure please refer to detailed information in the MCE Torqmax F5 manual that accompanied the ele vator controller Static Learn using KEB Torquemax Drive 1 2 Electrically disconnect the machine brake to prevent it from releasing 3 4 Pressand hold the Inspection Up key The motor should not turn The brake should Ensure that all motor related parameters have been accurately entered into the drive Set drive LF 3 to SPI and press ENTER The display will show StArt remain set The display will show eleven position values from the encoder When pole learn is complete the display will show donE Release the Inspection Up key and make note of the final position number in drive parameter LF 77 This position number is valid only for this motor and encoder If the encoder is changed or removed this process will have to be repeated Select LF 99 The display will show noP normal operation and LF 3 will automatically be set to run Reconnect the machine brake Verify encoder position is correct by running the car and monitoring the current drive parameter 93 If current is excessive the encoder rotation may be incorrect In this case change LF 28 from 0 to 10r from 1to 0 or from 2 to 3 or 3 to 2 and repeat the alignment process Once the data is loaded you can proceed to auto tuning calibrating the drive output
178. ek Company ASME RULES amp GUIDELINES Table8 11 2 1 3 c 1 Wire Suspension Types of A Wire Rope Note 1 6x19 class 24 30 32 40 8 19 class NERAL NOTE 6x 19 class rope has 6 strands ires per strand 8x 19 class rope has 8 stran 16 to 26 wires per strand NOTE limits may be used when inspections are monthly by a competent person rope exceeds values shown in column C of Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 1 or d if in the judgment of the inspector any unfavorable condition such as fretting corrosion red dust or rouge excessive wear of individual wires in the strands unequal tension poor sheave grooves etc exists the criteria for broken wires will be reduced by 5096 of the values indicated in Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 1 for any of the three conditions described above or e if there is more than one valley break per rope lay ROPES ON WINDING DRUM MACHINES SHOULD BE REPLACED IF BROKEN WIRES ARE DETECTED OR IF THERE IS MORE THAN ONE VALLEY BREAK PER ROPE LAY 2 On winding drum machines the rope shall be replaced a if the broken wires are equally distributed among the strands when the number of broken wires per rope lay in the worst section of rope exceeds 12 to 18 or b if wire breaks predominate in one or two strands when the number of broken wires per rope lay in the worst section of rope exceeds 6 to 12 or c if there is more than one valley break per rope lay
179. el 3 Install the rails in the usual fashion using forged clips at the pit channel and slide clips at other locations 4 Align and tram 5 Dress and clean as needed for smooth counterweight travel Car Rails The standard rail sections provided are 16 feet long Per job starting or finishing rail lengths may be shorter The elevation drawing will show where any short lengths are to be placed for the job 1 Install all rails tongue up 2 Install brackets and rails in the usual fashion 5 8 inch bolts flat and lock washers are provided along with the slide clips spacer hole locators and shims 3 Useforged dlips at the pit channel location Use slide clips for additional rail sections noe Depending upon available clearance rail angles may be turned short rather than long end to adjusting plate or the adjusting plate may be omitted Always use the spacer hole locator between the rail back and the angle bracket Shims are provided for fine adjustment Please refer to Rail Attaching Hardware on page 2 13 4 Check that the finished rail installation provides the correct DBG and is plumb parallel and perpendicular Dress rail guide faces if required 5 Ifneeded clean rails to ensure they are free of dirt rust paint or grease 2 20 Manual 42 02 1 Elevator Packages Rail Installation Governor Mounting With the standard MRL or overhead machine room installation the governor is mounted o
180. el wire ropes attached to the car frame or passing around sheaves attached to the car frame specified in 2 15 1 Ropes that have been previously installed and used on another installation shall not be reused Only iron low carbon steel or steel wire Suspension Rope Information ASME RULES amp GUIDELINES ropes having the commercial classification Elevator Wire or wire rope specifically constructed for elevator use shall be used for the suspension of elevator cars and for the suspension of counterweights The wire material for ropes shall be manufactured by open hearth or electric furnace process or their equivalent ALL RELEVANT ROPE DETAILS SHOULD BE RECORDED ON A ROPE DATA TAG UPON INITIAL INSTALLATION AND WITH EACH ROPE REPLACEMENT THEREAFTER 2 20 2 Wire Rope Data 2 20 2 2 On Rope Data Tag A metal data tag shall be securely attached to one of the wire rope fastenings This data tag shall bear the following wire rope data a the diameter in millimeters mm or inches in b the manufacturer s rated breaking strength c the grade of material used d the month and year the ropes were installed e the month and year the ropes were first shortened f whether the ropes were nonpreformed or preformed construction classification h name of the person or organization who installed the ropes i name or trademark of the manufacturer of the ropes j lubrication information
181. electrical tape Never use cable that appears to be damaged without first contacting MCE Hoistway Cable Install junction and fixture boxes as shown in the drawings package Install trough as shown in the MCE construction drawings Install conduit and wiring bun dles per best practices and local requirements Round Traveler Before installing round traveler you should strip the appropriate length usually 6 feet at the controller end and then hang the cable in the hoistway to allow it to relieve stresses caused by reeling and handling Stripping 1 Carefully measure and mark the stripping point 2 Usea tool like the Draka Flexi Peeler to score the full diameter of the cable at the stripping point Next turn the handle of the tool 90 degrees slit the jacket to the cable end and peel it away 3 With the braid exposed use tool like the Draka Sock Slicer to expose the wires A Caution Never use a knife or scissors to remove the braid Doing so can easily damage the conduc tors 4 Separatethe conductors by layer and carefully remove all the jute fillers 1 Information and some illustrations courtesy of Draka Elevator Products Inc 3 45 MeE kii Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Pre Hanging Pre hangingis an important step It allows the traveler to relax and straighten 1 Choosea solid anchor point high enough to allow the entire length of cable to be hung
182. em 7 and align the three slots on the edges with the bottom three slots of the top of the uprights The height of uprights and the number of slots at the top may vary per job condition 2 Place 3 8 bolts in the middle holes on the edges of the header and hold it in place Please note that on the daylight side the header is outside the strike upright and on the opposite side the header is inside the rear upright from the corridor side as shown in Figure 4 12 sub figures 2 3 and 2 4 Attach the header to the uprights with 5 16 bolts do not tighten yet Measure to con firm that the bottom of the header to the finished floor or sill level is equal to opening height 1 2 Square assembly and tighten all bolts 4 17 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompan 000 Figure 4 14 Uprights and Header Assembly Detailed Continued 3 2 3 9 4 FIGURE 2 3 FIGURE 2 4 4 Tietheuprights orif ordered upright extensions Item 12 to the hoistway wall or beam above using the upright brackets Item 13 provided per floor 5 Attach uprights extensions and upright brackets together with 5 16 bolts 6 Fasten the upright bracket to wall or beam with 3 8 anchor bolts Item Q Check assembly for level and square again Adjust as needed 4 18 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors Figure 4 15 Jamb Assembly and Installation Left Hand Shown 1
183. embling the frame 1 Make sure subsill angle on Daylight Line side is set approximately 3 16 before line if frame has standard 2 1 4 wide face Attach strut extensions to struts using 3 8 x 2 bolts through pre tapped Strut Keeper Attach Strut bottoms to Sub Sill with 3 8 x 1 1 4 bolts nuts and lock washers Attach Header angle to Struts with 3 8 x 1 bolts and nuts Extend Strut extensions to Sill Angle or Sub Sill of floor above and attach If floor rise is greater than supplied Struts and Extensions then tie off using Wall Angle N gt Wall angle Used at top floor or intermediate floors where rise is greater than strut length Strut Extensio Strut Standard lengths 8 and 10 Header Angle Rough Assembly example Sub Sill for Aluminum Sills Subsill Angle For Frame Attachment MeE Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 000 Figure 4 7 Assembling the Entrance 1 Assemble frame sides and head using 1 4 20 x 3 4 bolts 2 Attach the assembled frame to the subsill angles using 1 4 20 x 3 4 bolts 3 Attach frame head to header angle using Tex screws Header attaches to frame head with tex screws Header sits inside of frame head Frame head bolts to Frame 3 sides with 1 4 20 3 4 bolt and nut lt Back of frame head and side to sit flush Punched holes for Tex screw application
184. en Brinell Hardness of sheaves and tensile strength of wire GLOSSARY OF TERMS should also have a hardness of at least of 210 HB The hardness of a wire used should reasonably correlate with the hardness of the sheaves at an installation However one must bear in mind that rope hardness is only a small factor that affects sheave wear Other factors such as the rope s elongation behavior construction the geometrics of an installation groove type proximity of the sheave to the rope itself rope lubrication and maintenance regularity and technique all offer as great an impact and some would argue greater on rope or sheave longevity Standard Closing Point Contact rope constructions versus Parallel Closing Line Contact designs Brugg has chosen to produce rope utilizing Parallel Closing Line Contact design constructions in addition to the Standard Closing Point Contact designs offered by other manufacturers Parallel Closing designs offer users a multitude of solid performance benefits over Point Contact designs whenever high bend cycles are required including lower local pressures better load distributions higher flexibility characteristics minimal stretch and rope diameter reduction and improved travel comfort due to higher filling pressures In addition this type of construction also minimizes permanent remaining elongation of the hoist ropes Point Contact designs are relatively less sensitive to routine installati
185. en wires is unequal and broken wires predominated in one or two strands when the number of broken wires per rope lay in the worst section of the rope exceeds the values shown in column B of Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 1 or if four or five wires side by side are broken across the crown of any strand when the number of broken wires per rope lay in the worst section of rope exceeds values shown in column C of Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 1 or d if in the judgment of the inspector any unfavorable condition such as fretting cor rosion red dust or rouge excessive wear of individual wires in the strands unequal tension poor sheave grooves etc exists the criteria for broken wires will be reduced by 50 of the values indicated in Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 1 for any of the three conditions described above or e ifthereis more than one valley break per rope lay Table 6 4 ASME Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 1 Wire Suspension and Compensation Ropes Types of 6 x 19 class 24 30 12 20 9 x 19 class 32 40 10 16 16 24 GENERAL NOTE 6 x 19 class rope has 6 strands with 16 to 26 wires per strand 8 x 19 class rope has 8 strands with 16 to 26 wires per strand NOTE 1 The upper limits may be used when inspections are made monthly by a competent person 6 15 Maintenance MeE A Kinetek Company Nominal Diameter Guidelines 1 On any type of elevator the suspension compensation and governor ropes shall be replaced when their a
186. es Machine If these guards are in place on your machine remove them before installing the rope guard like the one shown above MRL Machine Bearing and Hitch Beams The machine bearing beams must be properly supported per the reactions shown on the final MCE construction drawings For MRL installations do not grout the machine or hitch beams in place until after the machine is installed and you are satisfied with the plumb of the installation 2 5 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Hoisting Machines Machinery eye bolts are provided for lifting hoist machines Before lifting it is important to be certain that you are aware of proper hoisting procedures correct eye bolt aligament and cor rect hoisting equipment for best practice nspect eye bolts and lifting equipment carefully Never use a damaged or worn eye bolt Never use a bent or elongated eye bolt Never machine grind or cut an eye bolt Check that threads on shank and receiving holes are clean Never exceed load limits for equipment or eye bolt size A Caution When lifting if the force on an eye bolt is other than in line 009 the working load must be adjusted downwards Additionally the force must be aligned with the long cross section of the eye See the following illustrations and tables Figure 2 5 Hoisting Eye Bolts Rated Load 009 View from directly above Lift Point 3096 of Rated Load Eye Eye G gt
187. ested if rope appears dry Use only recommended amounts of approved elevator rope lubri cant Improper lubrication can interfere with the friction between rope and machine sheave damaging or destroying the ability of a traction machine to properly raise and lower the car At a minimum ropes should be lubricated once per year or when dry to the touch Rope Twisting During installation rope may become twisted Twisted rope has a shorter lifetime and may even affect the ride of the elevator Twisting is easier to see if the rope manufacturer provides a visi ble line Figure 3 28 Rope Twist Detection Stationary sight line Sight line rotating around rope indicates no twisting indicates twisting Run the car on inspection completely through the hoistway countingthe times the sight line rotates around the rope 2 For 2 1installations you should see from 2 to 6 rotations per 100 feet 30 m of car travel 1 1 should be fewer than 3 rotations per 100 feet of car travel 3 Ifnecessary turn the shackles of the affected ropes in the correct direction to reduce twisting Remember to retension the roping system properly afterwards note If unacceptable twisting remains check to see that sheaves are properly aligned 3 31 MeE acida _ Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Anti Rotation Code requires that a means of preventing the ropes from rotating while allowing freedom of horizontal and vertical movemen
188. eties have been tested for slow speed temporary operation the false car can be removed Use the running platform to distribute all entrance frames sills struts headers hoist way doors and related hardware to each floor Start at the top working down installing all hoistway door equipment at each opening except the bottom floor The bottom floor should be left open to allow installation of the elevator cab Site conditions may vary this sequence Install all hoistway equipment traveling cable raceway conduit fixtures switches and hoistway wiring Install the cab door operator and car doors Finish the bottom floor entrance Install all equipment in and on the car top Finish car and hoistway wiring Complete controller wiring according to MCE controller drawings Commissioning Viii Adjust the car using all required tools instruments and manuals Conduct pre inspection testing as described in the controller manual Call your MCE Project Manager during pre inspection testing to ensure all required tests are rehearsed with acceptable results Conduct an acceptance test witnessed by the Code authorities Correct all punch list items Schedule re inspection if necessary The elevator installation is now ready to be turned over to the owner Manual 42 02 EPO1 5 17 11 VEN AS IN MeE Motion Control Engineering Package Description amp Site Readiness A Kinetek Company I n T
189. fer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirements 2 16 3 2 17 16 and 2 20 2 1 Door Operator Data Plate Attach the Door Operator Data Plate providing minimum door closing times to the power door operator or to the car crosshead Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 13 4 2 4 Suspension Ropes Data Tag Securely attach a metal data tag providing suspension wire rope data to one of the wire rope fastenings Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 20 2 Governor Rope Data Tag Securely attach a metal data tag providing governor wire rope data to the governor rope fas tening Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 18 5 3 Code Data Plate The Code Data Plate must be in plain view securely attached to the main line disconnect or on the controller For new installations the Code Data Plate must display the new installation code For alterations the Code Data Plate must also include the alteration code and any applica ble requirements of Section 8 7 Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Section 8 9 Safety Data Plates Securely attach a metal plate marked in a legible and permanent manner to each safety so as to be readily visible Please refer to ASME 17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 17 14 5 7 MeE Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Emergency Brake Data Plate For machines with dual brakes a si
190. ffers for any sign of leakage Visually check for wear debris leakage or overheating 6 50 gt Machine Clean using a dry cloth Machine Refer to manual for Motion 4000 or iControl AC as appropriate Elevator Controller amp Drive Refer to controller manual Guide Rails Check brake application and contact 6 50 gt 6 3 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Table 6 1 Minimum Maintenance Guideline Schedule Frequency Equipment Procedure Doors eck proper door operation and door safety devices 6 54 gt Ride each elevator Observe operation and sound Check and replace any burned out indicator bulbs Check for tripping hazards Clean machine space and pit ire pus Refer to Motion 02 4000 iControl Check traveling cables for tracking wear ee Lubricate lower brake arm shaft and brake shoe pivot shaft as instructed Machine in the manufacturer manual Verify equal rope tension 6 17 gt Check rope diameter 6 15 gt Check wire condition 6 15 gt Verify identification tags present Check for damage or distortion to structural elements 6 39 gt Speed Governor Lubricate rocker lever if needed Verify all joints secure and aligned 6 43 gt Guide Rails Verify all clips and brackets secure and undistorted Verify rail mounted devices securely in place Check securely mounted and fastened buffer stand
191. floor with alternating diagonal red and white stripes and a sign indicating DANGER LOW CLEARANCE must be posted Please refer to ASME 17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 4 1 6 Locking Device In conformance with ANSI 2535 2 or CAN 2321 a sign must be posted in the work area at the top of the hoistway stating WARNING Engage locking device before maintaining or inspecting brake emergency brake or controller Follow manufacturers instructions for use of locking device Elevator suspension means must be in place during use 5 9 Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Preinspection Checklist Table 5 1 Preinspection Checklist Controller Machine Room Access Approved walkway from the roof access door to the machine room access door if the roof slope exceeds 15 degrees from horizontal or if the roof parapet or passageway is less than 42 inches 1070 mm wide Non combustible weather resistant stair to machine room if applicable Controller Machine Room Door Self locking and self closing door Key security code is for the machine room door only and no other door in the building Machine room door swing does not impede on controller and disconnect clearances Machine room door meets applicable building code requirements for fire rating Minimum headroom of 84 inches 2134 mm maintained between floor and overhead equipment or ceiling
192. for reference use The instruction sheet shipped with the roller guides may be newer and is the controlling document if questions arise A Caution If you are installing more than one car check the job drawings very carefully to be certain you are using the correct roller guides for each installation Different roller guides are pro vided depending upon car weight and contract speed In addition to guide model differ ences different roller materials may also be used Refer to the construction drawings to verify proper guide location 3 16 Manual 42 02 EP01 Elevator Packages Counterweight I nstallation Elsco provides an instruction sheet describing roller guide installation adjustment and replacement parts This document describes mounting the roller guide to the MCE counter weight frame Figure 3 16 Counterweight Roller Guide Mounting Counterweight frame Rail retention plate Wheel cluster assembly Base assembly Hub adjusting screw nut spring 1 Referto the Elsco installation instruction Press and roll upward the wheel cluster assembly only onto the rail face until the center wheels are flat against the face of the guide rail blade See the illustration to the right 2 Insert the coil spring completely into the hub of the wheel clus ter assembly 3 Slidethe mounting bracket mounting base toward the counter weight onto the hub of the wheel cluster assembly Base 3 17 Platform and
193. fore checking level Add more oil if needed Buffer switch Connect in the elevator safety string as shown in the job prints Manufacturer data plate Describes the buffer and indicates oil type 6 45 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Maintenance Table 6 7 Buffer Specifications ECHE ue Eg in mm USG SEB16 SEB 25 17 13 435 44 33 1126 0 87 3 30 LB 16 7 99 203 24 26 616 1 22 4 62 6 46 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Car and Counterweight Buffers Oleo SEB Series i 1 6 2 54 m s 315 500 ft min __ for all applications 450 4545 kg 990 10 000 Ibs Model SEB 16 2 Rated speed m s 1 60 ft min 315 Maximum m s 1 84 striking speed ft min 362 Impact kg 450 4545 mass range Ibs 992 10 020 Stroke S mm 173 ins 6 81 Height H mm 536 ins 21 10 Height J mm 306 ins 12 05 Unit weight kg 11 20 less oil Ibs 24 69 Oil volume litres 1 45 ISO VG 68 U S gals 0 38 Environmental temperature acceptable conditions 15 C to 70 C Note for special conditions outside the above consult OLEO nternational Buffer must be securely supported and steadied vertically parallel to guide rails _ 5mm Non vertical applications consult OLEO International Buffer to be mounted in a suitable structure to support deceleration forces in accordance with installation sheet 6 47 Maintenance SEB 18 2 SEB 20 2 1 80 355 2 07 408
194. from a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker sized in conformance to all applicable national state and local electrical codes in order to provide the necessary motor branch circuit protection for the Drive Unit and motor Incor rect motor branch circuit protection will void the warranty and may create a hazardous condition Proper grounding is vitally important to safe and successful operation Ground equipment as indi cated in construction drawings and controller job prints You must choose the proper conductor size and minimize the resistance to ground by using the shortest possible routing See National Electrical Code Article 250 95 or the applicable local electrical code Before applying power to the controller physically check all the power resistors and other compo nents located in the resistor cabinet and inside the controller Components loosened during ship ment may cause damage or fail to function properly For proper operation of the AC Drive Unit in the controller you must make sure that 1 A direct solid ground is provided in the machine room to properly ground the controller and motor Indirect grounds such as the building structure or a water pipe may not provide proper grounding and could act as an antenna to radiate RFI noise thus disturbing sensitive equipment in the building Improper grounding may also render RFI filter ineffective 2 The incoming power to the controller and the outgoing power wires to the moto
195. g access to adjusting nuts Shape bracket in field to suit conditions 1214 6 1 8 24 Cut rod in field 52 x i 5 to suit conditions A 3 e 2209 9 1 4 I Tension Weight 0 B 25 i3 3 47 3 3 4 i 3 1 2 2 42 gt 1 1 4 Travel aU NEN WEN 4 4 2 1 2 to engage rails 62 82 22222222 t 1 5 8 N C TAP 2101728 5 Safety Block D B G Drilling Bottom Distance Between Guides FOR USE ON 8 11 12 15 18 1 2 22 1 2 RAILS TYPE INSTANTANEOUS SAFETY D 41 8 5 8 11 THD 4 HOLES 4 5 8 11 16 DRILL 4 HOLES 5 1 4 11 16 DRILL 4 HOLES SEE TABLE ON FOLLOWING PAGE FOR KEY NUMBERS 6 8 Manual 42 02 2 MRL Maintenance Car and Counterweight Safeties 540 Instantaneous safeties have a maximum tripping speed of 210 and a maximum gross load of 20 000 pounds Table 6 2 Parts List 540 Instantaneous Safety x DOI Bk o 54012 50774 W amp 1LILISFRa _ 540 22 Grip 22 124 Ral Only 540 3 gt G pos 8 joz 1 GovemorRodAsembiy e a pas f 15 or f Spacer 21 4 15 por k np SSS i p sui 25 _ 26 1 2 N C 27 1 2 Nut Jamb Washer Plain 1 2 Washer St
196. g com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope 9 brugg com www bruggrope com 6 23 Maintenance 6 24 BRUGG PROVED TO BE OTHER THAN AS WARRANTED AND BRUGG WIRE ROPE SHALL HAVE SOLE DISCRETION AS TO WHICH OF THESE REMEDIES IT SHALL PROVIDE BRUGG WIRE ROPE SHALL NOT REIMBURSE OR MAKE ANY ALLOWANCE TO A BUYER FOR ANY LABOR CHARGES INCURRED BY THAT BUYER FOR REPLACEMENT ADJUSTMENT OR REPAIR OF ANY GOODS OR PARTS THEREOF OR FOR ANY OTHER WORK UNLESS SUCH CHARGES ARE AUTHORIZED IN ADVANCE BY BRUGG WIRE ROPE a If any of the goods on which Brugg Wire Rope warranties have not expired are claimed to be defective in material or workmanship Brugg Wire Rope shall either examine the goods where they are located or in its sole discretion issue shipping instructions for return of the goods or any defective parts thereof if any goods or parts thereof are returned to Brugg Wire Rope the Buyer shall prepay all transportation charges for such return b Any claim for breach of Brugg Wire Rope warranties shall conclusively be deemed to be waived unless written notice of such claim is given to Brugg Wire Roppe within ten 10 days after the date on which the claimed defect is discovered c Brugg Wire Rope s warranties shall be considered null and void if the original buyer for use transfers ownership of the warranted goods unless Brugg
197. g upon requirements different entries may be used In all cases construction drawings are provided and are always the governing document should there be any question about installation or materials 4 2 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors A complete entrance viewed from the hoistway side is shown below for reference Figure 4 2 Hoistway Entrance Example Wall angle used to attach struts to hoistway N wall at top floor or mid floor with long rises Fascia top header and extension Hall Entrances and Doors If you are using the car as a sill template the guide rails must be properly aligned so that there is no variation in vertical and horizontal plumb and sill runby as the car moves through the hoistway ENTRANCES These instructions assume that proper sill angles have been attached in the hoistway below hoistway openings by the general contractor per requirements A complete entrance viewed from the hoistway side is shown on this page for reference Strut and strut extension Header plate Entrance frame UL shown Flat Fascia Hanger Dust cover Standard strut and strut extension able to connect to next floor if rise not greater than 12 6 7 7 NN M Toe guard with extension MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Entrances Car and Positioning System Packaging Typical rough package parts complement shown belo
198. gles only of one style or the other The extender plate is not normally required The bolt locator plate must always be used The shims are used only as needed General Rules for Rail Clips Slide clips are used with brackets that are attached to the building Forged clips are used with brackets that are not attached to the building Forged clips are used to attach rails to pit channels 2 13 Overhead and Rails Figure 2 13 Bracket Details PART 89 T127 2 4 T140 1 T127 2 amp T140 1 10 89 T 2 14 Manual 42 02 EPO1 60 03 0136 T127 2 amp T140 1 60 03 0139 60 03 0134 60 03 0135 60 03 0137 OR 60 03 0138 Rotated View 2 x 60 03 01 34 OR 2 x 60 03 0137 OISTW A WALL ON THIS SIDE 2 x 60 03 0135 OR 2 x 60 03 0138 60 03 0134 60 03 0135 OR OR 60 03 0137 60 03 0138 S 4 DIMENSIONS inches ___ Feto Fme Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 60 03 0136 OR 60 03 0139 0 to 0 375 5 to 6 25 6 25 to 11 375 0 75 to 1 625 Elevator Packages Rail Installation Figure 2 14 Rail Bracket Examples Bolt Flat washer Flat washer ock washer Nut This is an example of a special minimum clearance bracket that may be used in tight hoistways Hardware stack up is the same as with other brackets Table 2 2 Rail Bracket Shim 189 Rail Bracket Shim 30GA 4 4 60 04 0030 T89 Rai
199. gn stating EMERGENCY BRAKE must be attached to the emergency brake in a location visible from the area likely to require service The Emergency Brake Data Plate must also contain the maximum and minimum car mass and speed Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirements 2 19 3 2 h and 2 19 3 3 Speed Governor Data Plate Securely attach a metal plate containing the speed governor data to each speed governor Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 18 9 Counterweight Runby Data Plate In the pit in the vicinity of the counterweight buffer permanently and securely attach a data plate indicating the maximum designed counterweight runby Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA BA4 07 Requirement 2 4 5 Spring Buffer Data Plates Fach spring buffer must be provided with a marking plate indicating the load rating stroke and number of springs Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 22 3 3 Oil Buffer Data Plates Every installed oil buffer is required to have a metal plate containing the oil buffer data perma nently attached Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 22 4 11 Machine Groove Diameter Plate Drive sheaves and drums must be permanently and legibly marked to indicate the minimum sheave or drum diameter measured at the bottom of the groove that is required to maintain structural integrity Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 24 2 4 B
200. h Plate ACPM Machine Governor Machine Beams g a Car Roller Guides Car Hitch Beams Top ELGO hanger Final Limit switch Combination Car apron Bracket Positioning System 2 Positioning System Sensor Head Counterweight Counterweight guard Sling and platform Governor tension sheave and weight Sheave beams Car and counter weight pit channels Buffer and stand Final Limit switch Bottom hanger for ELGO positioning system 2 3 BUM Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Overhead nstallations This section describes those overhead supports and machinery provided for a typical installa tion Different hoistway constructions may require alternative support structures See your drawings package for specific equipment provided Figure 2 3 Typical MRL Overhead Layout ACPM Machine Typical machine beams Governor Counterweight hitch Car locking bolt receiver MRL only Beam ends typically rest in pockets pro vided by the general contractor End plates like these are normally not provided Car hitch plate and beams 2 4 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Overhead Installations Figure 2 4 Typical 400 Series I mperial PMAC Gearless Machine Depending on car weight and contract speeds the machine for your job may be 400 500 or 800 series Example of rope guard 478 Seri
201. hackle Ground Strap Ground strap installed at counterweight frame side of ropes Flat washer and lock washer upper most with 1 4 x 20 bolt through tapped hole in hitch plate Z Hitch plate 3 30 Manual 42 02 01 WW Lock washer on top of flat washer Flat washer on top and bottom of ground strap NOTE For 1 1 oped appli cations the isolation assembly is inverted under the counter weight hitch Only required when a ring amp string seismic detector is used MCE Elevator Packages Hoist Ropes Rope Tension Immediately after rope is installed and bearing operating weight you must check rope tension with a suitable device Matching torque on shackle nuts is NOT ADEQUATE because springs and hardware are not manufactured to suitable tolerances Using a device like the Brugg RPM Rope Performance Measurement tool adjust rope tension identically on all ropes Please refer to DEM Documentation Inclusions on page 5 13 Check runby and adjust tension weekly for at least eight weeks Thereafter check ten sion and counterweight runby during the regular maintenance visits Equalizing rope early in the construction process will prevent abnormal sheave groove wear and stress on individual ropes We recommend equalizing rope tension as soon as possible Rope Lubrication After installing check for sufficient car rope lubricant and lubricate if indicated Lubrication is sugg
202. he ESC button on the PLC twice The display should shown only the PO output on 10 Reconnect the Negative terminal of the battery 11 If necessary reset the controller fault Verify that the car is again running normally 5 6 Manual 42 02 01 MCE Elevator Packages I nstalling Data Plates and Safety Signs I nstalling Data Plates and Safety Signs Data plates and safety signs are provided with MCE s Machine Room Less MRL and Over head Traction elevator packages and original equipment manufacturers This section describes installation of the data plates and safety signs Applicable ASME 17 1 2007 CSA 44 07 Requirements are referenced A copy of the ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Code can be purchased at http catalog asme org Codes PrintBook A171CSA B44 2007 Safety Code cfm Data plates are unique for each elevator and each elevator is assigned a unique EP number for example EP 000001 Ensure that appropriate data plates are installed on each car Capacity Plate The Capacity Plate indicating the rated load of the elevator must be permanently and securely attached in a conspicuous position inside the car Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 16 3 Crosshead Data Plate The Crosshead Data Plate contains information about the elevator e g rated load and speed wire rope data rail lubrication instructions etc It must be permanently and securely attached to the elevator crosshead Please re
203. he controller Job prints If so equipped MRL the remote governor set and reset switches should also be connected at this point Both switches operate on 120VAC About the Governor Switches Governor Set Switch Pressing the governor Set or Test button provides voltage to the set solenoid mounted on the governor In order for the governor to set the car must be running and the switch must be held until the governor sets Governor Overspeed Switch The governor overspeed switch is adjusted to actuate at approximately 9096 of the governor mechanical tripping speed The switch is wired into the safety string so that when actuated power will be removed from the machine and the brake bringing the car to an immediate stop Refer to the controller job prints Switch Reset Refer to the controller drawings for wiring instructions When the Reset button is pressed depending upon switch state the switch will reset Alternately the switch may be manually reset at the governor Job Prints The controller job prints for the installation will detail switch wiring for each specific job Governor Roping Governor rope 3 8 traction steel right regular lay is cut to the correct length and provided to you on a spool Rope must be properly and carefully handled In addition to avoiding damage and dirt you must also remove the rope from the spools properly to avoid kinking Generally Raisethe reel so it can be easily rotated Haveone pers
204. here is no variation in vertical and horizontal plumb and sill runby as the car moves through the hoistway The elevator cab is generally assembled on the platform before the lower entrance is completed Please refer to Cab Assembly on page 4 23 MCE routinely uses Swiss Dane or National entrances and doors Drawings Approved construction drawings detailing landing entrance construction and car sill require ments are provided and are the controlling installation documents If there are differences between the manual and the construction drawing the construction drawing supersedes the manual Swiss Dane Entrances IThese instructions assume that proper sill angles have been attached in the hoistway below hoistway openings by the general contractor per requirements For MCE standard sills sill angle is installed one inch below FINISHED floor height See below Figure 4 1 Hoistway Sill Angles I nstalled 1 inch Below FI NI SHED Floor Rough landing opening w G e Finish floor material E Sub flooring if any Bottom of rough opening 1 inch from top of FINISHED floor to top of hoistway angle bracket NOT 1 inch from rough opening height to top of hoistway angle bracket Sill Angle by others Not all jobs are standard sills approved construction drawings are the controlling docu ment to which all hoistway work must conform 1 The most commonly used MCE entrances are described in this section Dependin
205. his Manual This manual describes installing a FREEDOM M MB Series machine beam supported traction elevator package from MCE Section 1 Package Description and Site Readiness Section 2 Overhead and Rails Section 3 Platform and Hoistway Section 4 Entrances Car and Positioning System Section 5 Operation Preinspection OEM inclusions Section 6 Maintenance 4 This manual describes a typical elevator package On many jobs differences in hoistway con struction and geometry will require alternative solutions Always refer to the final construction drawings package specific to the installation In addition we recommend the INSTALLATION MANUAL Basic Field Practices guide by Kermit Kraus for detailed technical instructions and common field practices ISBN 1 886536 48 1 1 1 Package Description amp Site Readiness Motion Control Engineering I n This Section This section provides a description of the elevator package contents including Hardware Packages Supporting Documentation 1 3 gt Options 1 4 gt Before you begin elevator package installation the job site must be correctly prepared Work by others that should be complete and checked Hoistway Shaft Well General Electrical e Equipment Storage Conditions Safety and Code Compliance Hardware Packages The MCE elevator package includes all major components required to complete an elevator inst
206. ht moves significantly Load weigher Load weigher inputs can be used to make dispatching decisions based on car load or to make anti nuisance decisions based on car load registered calls and photo eye information Security Car call and or landing call restrictions and or card reader interface Monitoring Hardware and software to support monitoring through MCE iMonitor or third party application Reporting Hardware and software to support reporting and data archival through MCE iReport application BMS LINK Hardware and software to support connection to building automation man agement application Allows limited control and ability to manually or automatically scale the number of running elevators to meet energy targets weighed against passenger demand Regenerative drive Addition of a small secondary drive that returns power generated by overhauling to the mains providing power to the primary elevator drive TAPS Traction Auxiliary Power Supply provides rescue power to elevator if commercial power fails automatically returning the car to a floor and permitting passengers to exit Passenger rescue assist system Remote machine brake lift and hoistway camera allow you to drift the car to a door zone and manually open the doors 1 4 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Hoistway Qualification Hoistway Qualification Smooth running trouble free elevators demand a well constructed hoistway Check hoistway and opening
207. i 009 2 s w 8 2 004 p ds 5 0 PIIN 10 uio2 s pinbo5si ojJu uoneoidde ino ssnosip OcOG E9E OLY 0 sn 95 e 15 640426 ue N Aupenb M 02S131V enjea pue si aweu 09513 ay 10 22 01 pue suonnjos p u ay Aq 1502 sapinb 02573 eoueuuojied q8l Jo e 20 sp1epuejs 01 p qui sse pue pa1oedsur Ploy eui ur queunsn pe eseo pue Buoj seunsua Ayjenb 1uBil pue Aujiqeanp jo uoneuriquioo eundo ue JO pue ejonp uibueas ejsuel ase sBunseo 09973 sjes 320 BJ9 O 5 160 BY JO esioaud 9 qeuo zey SUONEIGIA p
208. in MCE equipment We strongly recommend you review this preface and read this manual before installing adjusting or maintaining Motion Control Engineering equipment This preface dis CUSSES Safety Other Symbol Meanings Safety Precautions e In This Guide Safety and Other Symbol Meanings A Danger This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures instructions or situations which if not done properly might result in personal injury or substantial equipment damage A Caution This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures instructions or situations which if not done properly might result in equipment damage and potential nullification of equipment warranty This manual symbol is used to alert you to instructions or other immediately helpful information Safety Precautions A Danger This equipment is designed to comply with ASME A17 1 National Electrical Code CE and CAN CSA B44 1 ASME A17 5 and other applicable codes and must be installed by a qualified elevator contractor It is the responsibility of the elevator contractor to make sure that the final installation complies with all local codes and is installed in a safe manner This equipment is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10 000 rms sym metrical amperes 600 volts maximum The three phase AC power supply to the Drive Isolation Transformer if applicable used with this equipment must originate
209. ing Cam Hardware Figure 3 1 Typical Sling Platform Components Roller guide Crosshead Hoistway limit switch cam Car Locking Device Roller guide mounting rail retention plates iControl style positioning logs system Motion 4000 style positioning System sensor head mounting Diagonal brace rods 9 Stiles Platform Platform angle Sheave plank sheaves Safety Plank with safeties installed Safeties used will depend upon car load and speed Platform apron 3 2 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Sling Platform Assembly Safety Plank Sheave Plank Assembly MCE provides a base assembly consisting of the car safety plank with safeties installed and the car sheave beam with sheaves and guards installed A Danger Working with unroped platform components is extremely dangerous You must ensure that all components are safely and adequately supported during construction Support failure or collapse can result in extreme injury or death 1 Using blocking tools similar to Wurtec car builders set up to position the safety plank sheave plank assembly between the guide rails 2 Usea hoist to lift the base assembly into place on the blocking tools or supporting struc ture Figure 3 2 MCE Base Assembly with Safeties and Sheaves IN Car sheave and guard Example of a tool that clamps to the N rails and supports car construction
210. ing time This is more than sufficient to drift the car to a landing 5 3 Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Passenger Rescue Operation A Danger This system is for emergency use by qualified elevator personnel only The rescue system will move the car regardless of the state of the door locks or safety string It unconditionally picks the brake The machine windings are shorted so the car will not run away The goal is to move the car until the horizontal bar on the rescue panel LCD screen is centered between the horizontal bars on a hoistway sign At that point the car is in the leveling zone for that floor 1 Open the mainline disconnect for the elevator 2 If possible determine the location of the car in the hoistway and make contact with any entrapped passengers Determining how many passengers are in the car will help you know which way the car will probably drift 3 Verify all car and hoistway doors closed and that the hoistway is clear 4 Insert the key in the rescue panel and set it to RESCUE The LCD screen should light and display the camera s view of the hoistway If not check the unit is ON switch on side of LCD and brightness contrast adjustments on top until view is clear 5 Simultaneously press both of the BRAKE RELEASE buttons The brakes will lift and the car will begin to drift You may want to do this just briefly at first to get
211. is inaccurate to say the least Wire rope is not a static item but must be thought of as a machine with a surprising quantity of moving parts that must work in harmony with each other and the surrounding hoisting System To better appreciate the complexity of wire rope the high level of sophistication it requires to produce it and differences between the various forms we produce we offer readers this basic glossary of key terms Abrasion Excessive abrasion indicates a disharmony between the rope and surrounding supporting parts This can lead to costly wear on rope surfaces and on the sheave groove surface Abrasion is increased due to a host of factors including unequal tensioning of rope sets high and low tension ropes will experience higher abrasion worn or deformed sheave grooves elongation as it passes through sheaves excessive torsion of the rope along its axis during service misaligned sheaves or pulleys during installation using the incorrect rope the effects of vibration upon the rope lack of or poor lubrication Bending Cycles Elevator rope is made of soft steel and is primarily designed to be flexible While strong a hoist rope s wire and strand components must readjust constantly as a rope moves over the sheave flexes and eventually straightens back Naturally more bending cycles means more stress with an increased opportunity for fatigue breaks Often a secondary sheave
212. is provided Permanent lighting at elevator entrances provided at all occupied floors No tripping hazards at the landing sills 0 25 inch 7 mm or greater 5 12 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages OEM Documentation Inclusions OEM Documentation Inclusions These inclusions are for reference use The most current manufacturer installation and infor mation documents are shipped with the pertinent equipment from Motion Control Engineer ing Documents are included here for the benefit of the original manufacturer All related trademarks are the exclusive property of the equipment manufacturer e ELSCO Roller Guides Brugg RPM User Guide 5 13 Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompay 000 5 14 Manual 42 02 01 00 M 09513 10 pue 5 aweu 02513 99 ay 01 532 suonnjos y Aq 104 yoeoidde 9A299J2 1s02 sapinb 0985713 Soueuuojied 1 jo uun Ji e JOJ spsepueys pue pa1oedsur sjueuoduioo
213. ith Isolation Pads and Grounding Strap ground strap machine mount holes x6 num will vary top isolation bottom isolatior ome Flat Washer Nut y Nut Cotter Ke s D Snug the bolts nuts per sector starting in area C then area B then area D then area A A Caution IMPORTANT After the cab and counterweight are complete and a full load is in the car readjust the torque specification of the bolts in areas A and B to a torque specification of 50 lbf ft 2 9 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Overhead and Rails Isolation Pad Maintenance Monthly Check machine isolation pads for abnormal wear cracks or displacement from the originally installed location If any variation of isolation material is detected from the original installation replace as necessary Important Information About PMAC Machines Rotation of the AC current on the stator must be exactly synchronized to the rotation of the per manent magnet fields on the rotor This is accomplished by an absolute position encoder on the machine The encoder allows the drive to measure the exact positions of the magnets and align the stator field accordingly Please refer to Static Learn using KEB Torquemax Drive on page 5 5 Please refer to Elevator Controller Drive and ISO Transformer on page 3 52 and the elevator job prints for power cable connection information Machine Duty Labels MCE provides
214. itoring 1 4 Motor Cable Connections 3 52 Motor lubrication 2 11 Motor power cable shield 3 52 N National Electrical Code 1 9 O Oil buffer 3 13 3 22 Oil Buffer Data Plates 5 8 Optional Equipment 1 4 Overhead Package 1 2 Overspeed governor 3 34 Checks 6 39 Specifications 6 40 6 41 Passenger rescue device 1 4 4 48 Passenger rescue operation 4 55 5 3 Personnel certification 1 9 Pit Access Door 5 12 Pit Access Ladder 5 11 Pit Enclosure 5 11 Platform assembly 3 4 Platform Components 3 2 Platform hoisting 3 11 plywood 3 7 PMAC machine 5 5 Pre Hanging 3 46 R Rail Bracket Details 2 14 Rail bracket welds 2 18 Rail Clips 2 13 Rail Package 1 2 Records 6 2 Regenerative drive 1 4 Remote governor set reset 3 40 Reporting 1 4 Rescue assist installation 4 49 Risk of shock 1 9 Roller Guide Installation 3 16 Roller guides Car 3 24 Counterweight 3 16 Rope 6x19 6 18 8x19 6 18 9x19 6 18 Application recommendations 6 29 ASME Rules 6 19 Broken wires 6 15 Compensating 6 18 DP9 6 18 Glossary of Terms 6 25 Groove geometry 6 31 Handling 6 29 Inspection 6 31 Inspection overview 6 16 Installation 6 29 Installation accessories 6 32 Isolation assembly 6 33 Lubrication 6 30 Lubricator 6 32 Maintenance tools and lubricant 6 32 MCX SCX 8 6 18 MCX SCX 9 6 18 New rope adjustment 6 17 Nominal diameters 6 16 Reeving splices 6 32 Replacement 6 17 Runby 6 15 6 18 Shortening blocks 6 17
215. just the camera position until the horizontal stripe on the LCD is centered between the door zone top bottom lines on the sign 7 Placeadditional signs for each floor at the measured vertical and horizontal offsets 8 Testto ensure that the car is level at each floor when shown to be by the LCD screen Figure 4 51 Rescue Assist Labels Entrances Car and Positioning System Entrances Sill Fascia ys Measured offset Measured offset Fascia Sill Camera T IVN M Control Connections 1 Refer to the job prints 2 Make brake lifting and governor set reset connections as shown 4 52 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages MRL Rescue Assist System Programmable Logic Controller Setup The Programmable Logic Controller PLC is the monitoring and control unit for the manual rescue system The PLC moni tors the condition of the battery that powers the brake lifting and video components when in rescue mode If the battery falls below an adequate level the PLC will stop a normally operating car at the next available landing and not allow it to restart until the battery level is corrected The PLC also runs a battery and battery charger test once a week 10PM Sunday evening Test time may not be directly changed When you set the system clock in the PLC it cues from this setting to know when to run the test If you do not set system time the test will still be run but not at the progr
216. justment VA dial clockwise until you reach gt gt A 100 and hear another beep Your tension is now displayed in metric or imperial units Display Adjustment Dial On Okay Now insert rope between contact surfaces and device plug gauge VVV INE LU V V N WILE VVVV IDE OR AAAA Lor Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0208 sauce TECH TIPS RPM USER MANUAL TO CLEAR MEMORY UE E Okay and Mode button simultaneously AUTOMATIC STORAGE RPM automatically holds last 20 measurements recorded both diameter and tension ES MEASURING MODE SEE REVERSE for details on how to measure with RPM Unit auto retums to MEASURE MODE to view to select Units 5 Rope measurements must ONLY be taken on ropes that are completely stationary and the installation is secured against operation Tool use should be limited to trained personnel familiar N with these instructions d TENSION _ TENSION Now press All rope installations must to see be secured against the E ON e possibility of free fall Staff Press okay to Exit Return to
217. k in a rope may be adjusted by tapping the wedge with a hammer Insert a drift pin into the top of the socket body between the rope s load bearing and dead ends and tap the wedge until the rope slides Re tighten the wedge Repeat this procedure until all ropes have equal tension Tie down all rope sockets upon completion to prevent possible rotation Note Retaining wire rope clips are only used to hold the dead end of the wire rope in place They bear no load When installing retaining clips DO NOT APPLY more than 8 ft Ibs of torque on the bolt and nut More pressure can deform the clip assembly and shear the bolt deform the rope or raise a strand It may be necessary to loosen and readjust the retaining clips after a load has been placed on a wedge socket since movement of the wire rope under tension load can misalign the clips Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com www bruggrope com Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0208 6 29 Maintenance THE BRUGG i LINE INSTALLATION LINE Correctly installed ropes deliver longer product lifetimes greater safety comfort and shorter downtimes for service All elevator ropes regardless of construction or manufacturer are su
218. l face 3 Fortop rollers attach the seismic plate and the mounting bracket base to the crosshead see illustration on following page 4 Tighten lightly so that position may be adjusted Adjust the seismic plate guide mount so that there is 3 16 clearance between the back of the seismic plate notch and the rail blade face The rail blade should also be centered between the sides of the notch 5 Repeat for the remaining seismic mounting plates and roller guides 6 Adjust face and side rollers so that they contact the rail but will skid if rotated by hand note The Appendix section of this manual contains instruction sheets for the standard Elsco roller guides used by MCE They are for reference and future use The instruction sheet shipped with the roller guides may be newer and is the controlling document if questions arise A Caution If you are installing more than one car check the job drawings very carefully to be certain you are using the correct roller guides for each installation Different roller guides are pro vided depending upon car weight and contract speed 3 24 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Car Roller Guide Installation Figure 3 23 Typical Crosshead Mounted Roller Guide Assemblies Debris shield kit shipped with top mounted car roller guides This is a Type A roller guide for high speed and or heavy car applications The unit shown also has special high de
219. l Bracket Shim 206A 3 60 04 0031 T127 amp T140 1 Rail Bracket Shim 30GA T127 amp T140 1 Rail Bracket Shim 20GA 60 04 0035 T127 amp T140 1 Rail Bracket Shim 16GA 60 04 0036 T127 amp T140 1 Rail Bracket Shim 12GA 60 04 0037 T140 2 Rail Bracket Shim 30GA 60 04 0038 T140 2 Rail Bracket Shim 20GA 60 04 0039 T140 2 Rail Bracket Shim 16GA 60 04 0040 T140 2 Rail Bracket Shim 12GA 60 04 0041 2 15 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Car Rails Fish rail joining Plates Figure 2 15 Fish Plate and Rail Section Fish plate Rail section attached to fish plate Counterweight Rail Guides Brackets Counterweight Rails Counterweight Rail Clips Brackets are provided for the counterweight rails brackets cage the counterweight defin ingits location in the pit and hoistway and providing mounting points for the counterweight rails They are called combination brackets because one of the car rails mounts to the outside of the bracket Figure 2 16 Counterweight Rails Guides Combination Brackets Example bracket no extender Use slide clips End brackets are gussetted for additional strength Example bracket with extender Use slide clips 2 16 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Rail Installation Depending upon job clearances rail brackets may be used with the combination brackets or the rails may be clipped direct
220. l while a second person keeps enough tension on the reel to prevent slack in the rope Uncoil the entire length of rope and allow it to lay in a straight line When rope is laid over a sheave it should bend in the same manner as when originally wound Rope must never be dragged over an edge corner or dirty floor 3 26 Manual 42 02 01 MCE Elevator Packages Hoist Ropes Seizing Precut rope lengths are properly seized bound with special tape to prevent strands from unwinding before shipment After installing rope in shackles be certain to properly seize the loose end of the rope after clips are installed and prior to cutting excess Electrical or duct tape is NOT USABLE for seizing rope Car Sheaves The guards for the car sheaves are specially slotted so that they may be shifted out of position when roping the platform It is not necessary to remove the guards Figure 3 24 Car Sheaves When roping is complete adjust the sheave guard to provide approximately 1 8 3mm of clearance between rope crowns and guard Sheave guard mounts are slotted to allow the guard to be moved away from the sheave for roping 3 27 _ Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Hitch Plate Connections MCE provides a mix of short and long shackles so that the sockets are at a staggered height and clashing is prevented each rope should have a short shackle on one end and a long shackle on
221. lable Polyurethane composition roller wheels can be used to replace standard neoprene wheels in selected applications Refer to the ELSCO guide selector chart or call an ELSCO guide specialist to determine proper applications See our Frequently Asked Questions FAQ for more information about the trade offs between neoprene and polyurethane wheel compositions Special close clearance modification is available to limit overall guide width to 7 1 8 181mm on 5 8 16mm rail widths where required for tight hoistway clearances as in corner post applications Cover plate kits are in stock and available for added safety and protection Seismic retainer plates are available for select rail sizes Call or e mail for more information Model C Roller Guide Key Req Part d Description 1 1 EC18401 Bracket 2 1 18414 Hub Adjustment Screw 3 1 EC19762 Hub Adjustment Locking Nut 4 1 EA18362 Grease Fitting 5 2 EC18424 Side Arm Spring 6 2 18416 Fiber Sleeve 7 2 EC18421 Flat Washer 8 12 18422 Locknut 9 6 18417 Wheel Stud 10 6 EC18440 Wheel Stud Lock Washer 11 2 18411 Side Arm 12 6 Roller Wheel See Roller Wheel Options Below 13 1 EC18425 Hub Spring 14 2 EC18418 Side Arm Stud 15 2 ED02008 Rubber Washer 16 1 mEC19751 Hub 17 4 EA19747 Side Arm Tracking Screw 18 4 EC18428 Hex Nut 19 2
222. lable for added safety and protection Seismic retainer plates are available for select rail sizes Call or e mail for more information Model B Roller Guide Key ES Part Description 02101 EB02104 Face Arm EB02102 Left Side Arm EB02103 Right Side Arm EB02106 Pivot Pin EB02105 Wheel Stud EA18388 Wheel Stud Lock Washer Rail Side Roller See Roller Wheel Options Below 02107 Side Face Arm Stud EA18379 Side Face Arm Spring EA18373 Flat Washer EA18376 Locknut EA18378 Rubber Washer EA19765 Set Screw Rail Face Roller See Roller Wheel Options Below 16 3 02119 Adjustable Stop Standard Roller Wheel Configuration for Typical Installations 12 4 mEA18359 Standard Neoprene Roller Wheel Assembly 6 in 152mm 21 2 mEA18359 Standard Neoprene Roller Wheel Assembly 6 in 152mm Polyurethane Roller Wheel Configuration for Heavy Duty Installations 12 4 mEA18347 Polyurethane Roller Wheel Assembly 6 in 152mm Rail Side 21 2 18348 Polyurethane Roller Wheel Assembly 6 in 152mm Rail Face 3 O N co W O OO OO OO N OO 0 H ELSCo lt Lind sa a DAC aao que lt p gt gt 5 0 sn E2 se d aie M ODS14 IV pue snouuKuoufs si aweu 02573 992 POM eui
223. ld If so please consult your MCE project manager 3 41 TCR S _ Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company With the safeties properly installed on the safety plank there should be 3 16 clearance between the safety jaws and the side surface of the rail blade on each side The inside edge of the grip should be about 1 4 back from the face of the rail Figure 3 36 Safety Adjustment 3 16 Gripping Jaws 1 Raisethe safety lever A observing the braking surfaces of the safeties Each gripping surface on both safeties must engage the rail at the same moment If not Loosen nut s C and adjust effective length of relating rod B Retighten nuts Safety Test When installation progress allows test safety operation at inspection and governor tripping speeds 1 Check the level of the platform 2 With the car running at Inspection speed set the safeties After observing loss of trac tion remove power from machine and brake 3 Check the level of the platform If any racking is detected caused by non simultane ous Safety setting you will need to readjust safeties to assure all gripping jaws contact rails simultaneously and re test 4 Run the car up on inspection to reset the safeties Reset the governor by hand or using the switch in the controller 3 42 Manual 42 02 01 MCE Elevator Packages Safety Adjustment Tripping Speed Test the safeties at mechanical tripping spee
224. lifornia Install after test 6 14 Manual 42 02 EP02 MRL Maintenance Suspension Rope I nformation Suspension Rope Information Hoist ropes stretch about 6 per 100 The initial and greatest amount of stretch will take place immediately upon putting the full weight of the car and counterweight on the hoist ropes Over time they will continue to stretch but at a much slower rate until they reach their maximum amount of stretch Code requires a minimum counterweight runby so as the ropes stretch they need to be adjusted accordingly This is accomplished by removing spacer blocks under the counterweight adjust ingthe hoist rope shackles or shortening the hoist ropes The maximum counterweight runby allowed by Code is calculated along with other factors based on the distance from the car crosshead to the underside of the machine beams with the car level at the top landing With an extremely high rise car the ropes may be adjusted and or shortened many times before all the stretch has been removed Examination Check the rope data tag to determine the rope used on a specific installation Wire Suspension and Compensating Ropes 1 Wire suspension and compensating ropes shall be replaced e a if the broken wires are equally distributed among the strands when the number of broken wires per rope lay in the worst section of the rope exceeds the values shown in column A of Table 8 11 2 1 3 cc 1 or b if the distribution of brok
225. ling type shown is MCE standard Refer to job specific cab drawings for ceiling details for each job PRE WELDED CEILING FRAME POLYGAL LAY IN PAN lt Figure 4 31 Sill Attachment SILL SHOULD EXTEND PAST DAYLIGHT LINE AT LEAST 1 1 2 STRIKE JAMB IS NOTCHED AT FLOOR HEIGHT FOR SILL ALUMINUM SILLS PROVIDED BY MCE ARE HATCH STYLE SILL SHOULD EXTEND PAST DAYLIGHT LINE BY AT LEAST 1 1 2 AND MAY EXTEND PAST THE FRONT OF PLATFORM BY 1 8 4 33 MeE Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Figure 4 32 Vertical Panel Attachment PANELS ARE NUMBERED FOR ATTACHMENT IF INTERIOR PANELS ARE SUPPLIED NUMBERING IS LOCATED ON FINISH SIDE OF PANEL IF PANEL NUMBERING ON THIS PAGE IS EXAMPLE IS VISIBLE OR IF NO INTERIOR PANELS SUPPLIED ONLY CORRECT NUMBERING WILL BE MARKING WILL BE ON BACK ON PAGE ATTACHED TO PROJECT PANEL MARKING STARTS ON LEFT SIDE PLAN VIEW SHELL PANEL 3 CORNER SHELL PANEL 2 N N SHELL PANEL 4 LEFT SIDE SHELL PANEL 1 7 SHELL PANELS FABRICATED WITH FLOOR THICKNESS INCLUDED i e CAB HEIGHT 96 FLOOR HEIGHT 1 4 TOTAL PANEL HEIGHT 96 1 4 IF INTERIOR PANELS ARE TO BE APPLIED THE NATURAL VENT SLOTS ARE RAISED TO BE CONCEALED BY THE INTERIOR PANELS CORNER PANELS IN MOST CASES ARE FORMED 90 DEGREES ALL PANELS ARE NUMBERED ON BACK OR FRONT NUMBERING STARTS FROM LEFT SIDE FRONT PANELS ARE ATTA
226. lt not provided for traditional overhead applications braces ASME compliant tapered nan washers and hardware provided Front and Rear angles not shown in this picture 3 5 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Platform and Hoistway Braces and Platform Leveling Diagonal braces are used to properly torque and adjust the platform to stile geometry so that everything is plumb and square and level The braces provide rigidity and form to the sling structure Please refer to Typical Sling Platform Components on page 3 2 1 Insert level adjusting bolts and locking nuts through the box tubing at the bottom of each diagonal brace to the point of just touching the underside of the platform 2 Adjustthe bolts as required to square the platform with the true plumb stiles Figure 3 6 Stile Braces Locking nut 3 Check parallel square level and plumb aspects of the sling assembly Safety plank stiles Platform angles stiles Brace rods stiles e Crosshead stiles Brace rods platform angles 4 Check that tapered washers are properly used where required to ensure through bolts are square Tighten securing bolts 5 Tighten locking nuts on adjusting bolts down to the face of the box tubing so that the adjusting bolts cannot move over time 3 6 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Sling Platform Assembly 6 Set platform assembly onto isolation
227. ly to the combination brackets Refer to your job drawings Figure 2 17 Rail Attachment to Combination Brackets Slotted mounts are provided where appropriate to allow adjustment as needed Rail brackets may be used as Or the front piece of the combina above tion bracket may be rotated and the rail attached directly Forged clips are used with the pit channels while slide clips are used in all remaining positions 2 17 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Layout Referto the job layout drawings Verify that pit dimensions are as shown Verify that pit walls are plumb from top to bottom Verify that any grouted in work is as specified Verify that pockets for machine and other bed plates are as specified Verify that hoisting support beams are in place and adequate to the job Verify that hoistway lighting and electrical are present and as specified Check pit floor is level and in good condition Welds Once installation and final adjustment are complete we advise an appropriately certified welder to additionally secure combination bracket adjustment points against any potential loos ening or movement Figure 2 18 Recommended Rail Hardware Weld Points Angle to angle contacts Rail backs to angle all rail securing points Angle to angle contacts 2 18 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Rail Installation Car and Counterweight Pit
228. missible Use Double Seizing on each end when installing new ropes or when shortening them Use Triple seizing with parallel design ropes such as Brugg DP9 or Brugg HRS shown in photo at far left ROPE TENSION Immediately after initial installation and approximately 3 months following we recommend checking rope tension with a suitable device Simply setting the rope tension by adjusting the spring or buffer tension is NOT SUFFICIENT manufacturing tolerances on springs and buffers are not precisely controlled t 41117 7 IV Y _ 4 A AL ES a E AUY A AUI f f A y A AM a f 1 F3 F1 F4 Brugg RPM Rope Performance Measurement device assures F5 accurate tensioning quickly easily and economically 6 30 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company LUBRICATION OF THE ROPES All Brugg Wire Rope elevator ropes are lubricated during their manufacture Nevertheless all elevator ropes must be checked for sufficient lubricant immediately after their installation and be relubricated as needed Ropes should never be operated if they are not lubricated Use only the proper quantity of lubricant sufficient for the job Lubricants should not drip from the rope during the operation of the elevator We recommend the use of the Brugg special lubricant or an equivalent lubricant Regular rope lubrication has positive effects on
229. mmends using rope sets from only one manufacturer Lubrication Brugg Wire Ropes are lubricated during production to help prevent corrosion and abrasion Rope elements are designed to flex or bend during use and this movement creates an enormous amount of internal friction To combat friction s effects lubrication is applied upon stranding the point where all the wires are joined together insuring that each wire has a surface bearing a fine film of protective lubricant Brugg then removes the excess lubricant from the surface of the finished strand Good lubrication can almost double a rope s service life As part of maintenance lubricant must be reapplied to counter dirt build up abrasion and the natural depletion of lubricant that occurs during use Preforming Preforming is part of the manufacturing process that gives wire rope its characteristic helical form and occurs prior to final closure The process reduces internal torsional stresses and increases the fatigue resistance of wires creating a more stable and better balanced rope Most elevator ropes are preformed Preforming creates ropes that run over drums and sheaves more efficiently thus making them easier to handle and more efficient to install However preforming itself does not eliminate the absolute necessity for a professional to seize and in some cases triple seize a rope prior to cutting Prestretching hoist rope may require a number of
230. n camera lens Hoistway Lighting Ropes e Lubricate as needed Clean if needed Check rope tension Check rope diameter Check strand condition Check for no obstructions Check for sheave wear alignment Check rope height in grooves Rails Secure Properly aligned Clean if needed Hoistway Switches Check all switches are securely mounted Check all switches are functional Traveling Cable Check securely fastened Check unobstructed Check anti sway if used Check traveling cable does not contact hoistway wall or pit floor Rescue System Check leveling zone floor indicators are in position and legible 6 66 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Detailed Checklist Landing Doors Clean Lubricate Check closers Check gibs Check sills Check door locks Control Space Lighting Controller e Vacuum Car Doors Check ambient temperature Check humidity If controller has A C Check drainage Clean unit Lubricate Check refrigerant Check drive connections Check brake and motor contactor condition Check fuses Check rescue system battery Check rescue system video Check rescue system controls operation Check emergency brake operation Check emergency power disconnect Clean TAPS unit Check TAPS operation Clean track and hangers Lubricate track and hangers Check door operation Check clutch operation Check pick up wheels Check restrictor and linkages Check door closing forces
231. n the machine beams Refer to MCE construction drawings for the installation If site conditions do not allow this the governor mounting assembly shown below or an appro priate alternate is used Figure 2 20 Alternate Governor Mounting Assembly Assembly mounts to guide rail at location and height shown in drawing b package RR Forged rail clips are used to attach the governor mount to the guide rail 2 21 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 2 22 Manual 42 02 1 MeE RR VIN VC Motion Control Engineering Platform and Hoistway A Kinetek Company In this section This section describes car assembly and hoistway mechanical work including Sling platform Assembly 3 2 gt Counterweight Installation 3 12 gt Car Buffers 3 22 gt Car Roller Guide Installation 3 24 gt Hoist Ropes 3 26 gt Governor Installation 3 33 gt Safety Adjustment 3 41 gt Temporary Run Box 3 44 gt Traveler and Hoistway Cables 3 45 gt Compensation 3 48 gt Balancing the car 3 49 gt Car Top Locking Bolt 3 50 gt Controller and Isolation Transformer 3 52 gt 3 1 TCR Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Sling Platform Assembly Materials needed to assemble the car frame and platform are Safety plank sheave beam assembly Platform Stiles Crosshead Brace Rods Switch Operat
232. nd water in the pit Pit drains designed with a positive means to prevent water gases and odors from entering the hoistway Sumps and sump pumps installed in elevator pits are covered e The cover is secured and level with the pit floor Sump pumps installed in pits have a dedicated single supply receptacle e This receptacle is not required to be of the GECI type Pit drain if the elevator is provided with firefighter s emergency operation Fach pit receptacle shall be a GFCI type except for sump pumps Permanent lighting installed in the pit with illumination of not less than 100 Lux at the pit floor Pit light provided with a guard Pit light switch installed and easily accessible from the bottom landing door Pit Access Ladder e Installed within 40 inches 1000 mm horizontally from the unlocking means of the bottom landing door Extending from the pit floor to a point 48 inches 1200 mm above the bottom landing door sill minimum of 15 75 inches 400 mm wide If unavoidable obstructions are present the width maybe reduced to not less than 9 inches 225 mm Ladder rungs cleats or steps spaced no greater than 11inches 300 mm from center and rung clearance of no less than 4 5 inches 115 mm Fixed in place and made of non combustible material No obstructions within the ladder rungs cleats or steps 5 11 Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions Motion Control Engineering
233. netek Company Car Top Locking Bolt MRL Applications The slide lock bolt assembly is mounted on the crosshead of the car sling before shipment You will need to mount the receiver plate on the guide rail and wire the bolt position switch into the safety string as shown in the controller job prints Figure 3 41 Blocking Device Locking bolt Bolt operating handle unlocked position Lock detent Securing bolts penetrate both the top flange and the side of the stile for strength and rigidity Tapered washers are used on top inside of the chan nel to compensate for the taper of the flange Locking bolt switch with 1 2 NPT Danger The car top locking bolt is only intended for use with suspension ropes in place It is NOT intended to support the car without suspension means in place and may not be used to sup port the car for roping 3 50 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Car Top Locking Bolt MRL Applications Figure 3 42 Locking Device Lock Plate Use forged rail clips and provided hardware to attach the receiver plate to the guide rail at the height indicated on the construction drawings The measurement should be taken from the upper most finished floor to the center of the receiver plate When latching the bolt posi tion it in the center of the receiver hole 3 51 MeE na Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Elevator Controller Drive
234. ng Machine I nspection Fspecially if the machine has been stored beyond thirty days and before connecting any wiring Check that there is no condensation If there is condensation contact manufacturer for drying instructions before proceeding Usea megohm meter to check insulation between motor phases and ground terminal Minimum 100M ohms 500VDC for 60 seconds Encoder Imperial PMAC machines use a Heidenhain M ECN1313 encoder Pinout and general specifica tions follow Pins on encoder are male Pin Signal 7 Up Power supply voltage 1 Sensor Up 10 OV 4 Sensor 11 Inside Shield 15 A 16 A 12 13 B 14 DATA 17 DATA 8 CLOCK 9 CLOCK DO NOT USE VACANT PINS OR WIRES Table 6 8 ECN1313 Encoder Information Criteria Description Data interface EnDat Postionsperrev 8192 13 bit Incremental signals 1Vpp Line count 2048 Power supply 5V 5 Max current consumption w o load 150 mA Max cable length 150m 492ft Brake Adjustment Refer the Imperial Electric manual accompanying the specific machine 6 51 Non Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Lubrication 475 478 522 525 ACPM Machines This instruction describes lubricating the 475 478 522 and 525 Series ACPM machines from MCE Failure to keep machines properly lubricated will result in loss of warranty Lubricate once every 3000 hours or 6 months of operation A Caution SKF LGEP 2 grease is the only recommen
235. nopy panels 4 27 Ceiling 4 44 Corner panels 4 26 Interior 4 43 Transom 4 29 Wall panel detail 4 25 Wall panels 4 24 Car amp Hoistway Package 1 2 Car apron 3 9 Car Blocking Device 3 2 5 2 Bolt Receiver 3 51 Car buffer 3 22 Car Buffer Channel 2 12 Car Operating Panels 4 47 Car Rails 2 20 Car safety 3 41 Cartop handrail 4 45 Channel anchors 2 19 Code Data Plate 5 7 Codes 1 9 Compensation 3 48 Contact Information 1 2 Control Space 1 7 Counterweight buffer 3 13 Counterweight Buffer Channel 2 12 Counterweight derailment detector 1 4 Counterweight Frame Assembly 3 12 Counterweight governor 3 39 Counterweight Installation 3 12 Counterweight Lock down 3 20 1 Counterweight Rails 2 20 Counterweight Rails Guides 2 16 Counterweight roller guides 3 16 Counterweight Runby Data Plate 5 8 counterweight safeties 3 15 Counterweights fillers 3 20 Crosshead 3 2 Crosshead Data Plate 5 7 Crosshead Mounted Roller Guide 3 25 D Danger Low Clearance Sign 5 9 Data plates 5 7 Diagonal braces 3 6 Documentation 1 3 Door Closing Force 6 54 Door Closing Time 6 54 Door operator Nomenclature 6 54 Door Operator Data Plate 5 7 Doors and Door Operator 4 47 Driving machine Checks 6 50 Driving machines Lubrication 6 50 Drop ceiling install 4 41 Emergency Brake Data Plate 5 8 Entrance example 4 3 Entrance sill angles 4 2 Entry door header 4 7 Extending oil buffers 3 22 Eye bolt alignment 2 7 Eye bolt loading 2 6
236. nor Mounts to bracket on stile 17 70 inches 450 mm 3 35 MeE e Os OE 5 o e lt Platform and Hoistway H W Governor Specifications and Parts List Figure 3 32 HW207 RS Specifications 1 PO Pip su 12 5 1 CABLE L _____________ 3 36 Manual 42 02 01 Car Governor Installation Elevator Packages Figure 3 33 HW207 RS Specifications 2 b MOZI ITI I LR 7 NUI Y n M d E et SUR AA SHAFT DETAIL SECTION A A en c gt 3 37 Platform and Hoistway Figure 3 34 HW207 RS Parts List NO ITEM PART DESCRIPTION i DESORPTION Governor Sheave 0 375 Cable Pawl Weight Pawl Weight Head Resetting Hammer 0 375 Cable 6 201 00785 1 Bracket Speed Switch 8 25 1 J Gand Shave gt 5 0 0 9 205 02 1 0375 Cable Pin 0 50 Hammer Link Washer Cup Spring Retainer 201 023RS 1 Switch Resetting Speed Bushing Nylon Hammer Pivot Assembl 2001 4 6 jErng Trarc f5133 50 200 02 6 513337 00 0 90 03 hs Nec Washer Spacer 0 75 460 asher Spacer 0 50 400 Spring 175 to 225 fpm Trip 400
237. nsity poly rollers Neoprene rollers are typical Rail restraint guide mount plate 4 This is Type B roller guide for 7 IU PM moderate speed average capacity m Lom applications The unit shown has standard neoprene rollers A debris shield is used when this guide is mounted on top of the car The roller guide bolts through the Position Restraint plate into tapped holes allowing the roller guide and position restraint plate to be adjusted independently The restraint plate has slotted holes to allow adjust ment to the rail face The cross plate at each end of the crosshead is tapped for guide mounting 3 25 MeE siia kii _ Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Hoist Ropes Standard MCE elevator packages use Brugg 8 x 19 right regular lay rope Ropes are precut to length and shipped per car with each precut rope on its own spool MCE selects rope and sheaves designed for the roping configuration required taking into consideration the number and direction of bends load sheave diameters hardness and grooving Elevator rope is an integral part of the hoist machine with its own internally moving parts wires and lays and must be considered while engineering the job just as all other critical factors must be note Rope must be stored properly in a clean dry area sheltered from weather and sun and not exposed to contamination by dirt sand etc Failure to store rope
238. nual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Doors and Door Operator The Minimum Closing Time tables on the following pages reflect an average kinetic energy of 7 37 foot pounds 2 50 foot pounds nudging and provide the minimum code closing times for most normal door configurations and sizes normal and nudging operation When using the tables consider Closing Time Distance For side opening doors code distance starts two inches 2 from the jamb and ends two inches 2 from full close For center opening doors code distance starts one inch 17 from the jamb and ends one inch 17 from full close Average Kinetic Energy 7 37 foot pounds Table times are based on this energy calcula tion Calculations include equipment rigidly connected thereto all hangers rollers clutches releases closers and reopening devices and the rotational inertia of the motor and operator Actual Kinetic Energy peak energy 17 00 foot pounds Using MCE equipment and fol lowing instructions carefully you should not exceed the actual kinetic energy requirement if your door closing time complies with the time shown in the table for your door Reduced Nudging Kinetic Energy 2 50 foot pounds If the performance requirements of the job allow nudging speed closing time can safely be calculated as twice the normal clos ing time If performance demands greater speed please contact MCE Technical Support for assistance 6 55 Maintenance Table 6
239. o Normal mode if when there is a loss of connection to INCT Machine Room Inspection operation is prevented until the INCP 2 Bus jumper is removed It is imperative that any temporary jumper installed in the controller be removed as soon as the equipment wiring it is simulating is in place Temporary jumpers or wires may not be stored in the control room or space INCP 2 3 44 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Traveler and Hoistway Cables Traveler and Hoistway Cables The hoistway cable is a bundle of electrical conductors bound together using a string or web wrap to facilitate easier wire pulling through conduit and easier lay up in troughs The hoistway cable originates at the elevator controller and connects to fixtures the hoistway safety string and other fixed components in the hoistway Spare conductors are provided as specified The traveler cable a bundle of electrical conductors packed together inside a heavy vinyl jacket for protection carries information and power to from the elevator car Freedom elevator pack ages include special pre labeled traveler cable for Motion 4000 or iControl installations Spare conductors are provided as specified Handling Traveler and hoistway cable must be handled properly to avoid damage e When moving a reel of cable with a forklift never allow the cable to contact a fork Lift only on the reel itself Storein a clean dry area Seal open cable ends with
240. ob All pertinent local and national codes must be adhered to A Danger Heavy equipment hoisting and high voltages are extremely dangerous Accidents can easily result in death or serious injury It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that all applicable workplace safety regulations are strictly enforced that all equipment is suited to the task and well maintained and that all personnel are appropriately trained and certified Safety Certain fundamental warnings must be kept in mind at all times to help avoid accidental death severe personal injury or equipment damage Equipment may only be installed by qualified licensed trained elevator personnel Always take proper precaution against falling Harnesses should be worn at all times when working in the hoistway If you are working over an opening to the hoistway keep it cov ered for safety Secure tools with tethers to prevent a falling tool from endangering personnel Always use appropriate warning signs or tape around working areas Secure doors that might allow entry by unauthorized persons Verify safety devices limits governors hoistway locks car gate etc are fully functional before running the elevator Never operate controls with any safety device inoperative The user is responsible for complying with the current National Electrical Code with respect to the overall installation of equipment and proper sizing of electrical conductors The use
241. of steel used and the degree of preforming Additional factors like car weight rope speed rope configurations braking and acceleration speeds shaft height and rope lengths and sheave conditions make it difficult to determine an actual rate of constructional stretch Core Wire ropes are generally constructed using two types of cores fiber and steel wire Historically standard fiber core ropes have been made using sisal yarn which is a natural fiber Today however the industry is moving towards the use of synthetic fiber core ropes These materials offer the advantage of being more precise in diameter form stable and are more resistant to the effects of humid environments Elastic Stretch Elastic stretch results from the recoverable elongation of the steel strands and wires in a hoist rope Elastic properties for wire ropes are well documented and allow precise calculations to be made in determining elastic stretch characteristics GLOSSARY OF TERMS Hoist Rope Stretch In Inches Based On Rope Length In Feet 80 Rope Stretch 70 In Inches At x 30 4 _ 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 11001200 1300 1400 1500 8x19 RRL Sisal 0 596 DP9 RRL PP 0 396 HRS RRL IWRC 0 296 For a more detailed analysis of Rope Stretch contact Brugg Wire Rope Elongation During usage all wire ropes will natu
242. om defects in workmanship and materials Any defect appearing more than 15 months from the date of shipment from the factory shall be deemed to be due to ordinary wear and tear Manufacturer however assumes no risk or liability for results of the use of the products purchased from it including but without limiting the generality of the forgoing 1 The use in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits systems assemblies or any other material or equipment 2 Unsuitability of this product for use in any circuit assembly or environment Purchasers rights under this warranty shall consist solely of requiring the manufacturer to repair or in manufacturer s sole discretion replace free of charge F O B factory any defective items received at said factory within the said 15 months and determined by manufacturer to be defective The giving of or failure to give any advice or recommendation by manufacturer shall not constitute any warranty by or impose any liability upon the manufacturer This warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of the purchaser and the exclusive liability of the manufacturer AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED IMPLIED OR STATUTORY AS TO MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR PURPOSE SOLD DESCRIPTION QUALI TY PRODUCTIVENESS OR ANY OTHER MATTER In no event will the manufacturer be liable for special or consequential damages or for delay in performance of this warranty Products that
243. on rail There should be approximately 1 8 between side of rail and face of grip Also inside edge of grip should be approximately 1 4 back from face of rail 2 Dueto motion lag linkage must be adjusted to advance grips on opposite side of gover nor to contact rail before grips on governor side To accomplish this advancement Set all four grips to engage rail at same instant Remove pin A and thread yoke B one full turn toward governor side of car Re insert pin A To insure proper operation of safety the guide rails must be clean Lubricate with rail oil or light coat of Nylub if required NOTE No safety lubrication is required 0 25 in Yoke B FRONT Safety grip g 0 125 in 6 6 Manual 42 02 2 MRL Maintenance Car and Counterweight Safeties The linkage assembly pictured below is used on both the 540 and 480 safeties Differences called out a To Governor PART NO DESCRIPTION i GE ES s 15 2 COUPLING Chicago Line 3 2 L _ 540 10 inches 254 mm 22 9 gt 5 12 NC 4 NEM x O M 3 1 8 x 1 1 4 PIN COTTER 7 Reproduction of HOLLISTER WHITNEY Safety Lever GOVERNOR ROD ASSEMBLY Assembly Sheet 480 25 and 540 25 MeE unos Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company To Governor Safety Block D Drilling Top Locate above cab top allowin
244. on rope is out of proportion that particular rope will be affected dramatically and will wear quickly Conversely low tension ropes may exhibit a sliding action through the sheave groove which can wear both the rope and the sheave To put it simply think of a sheave as your average automobile Continue the allusion further by imagining hoist ropes running under different loads or tension as a set of badly inflated tires on that car How many miles will those tires last if they are severely under or over inflated A rope running in sheaves subjected to unequal loads tension will give you comparable results If rope tensions are unequal from 5096 to over 10096 percent differences have been observed in the field it can lead to rapid wear of the outer wires and sheave grooves Flat spots wire damage created through wear bending and high tension can all heighten stress conditions and lead to early rope failure Naturally our tire metaphor is slightly deficient due to the simple fact that a poorly inflated tire rarely impacts the actual road it travels on However a badly tensioned rope can damage another part of the elevator hoisting system e g the sheave creating a problem that can be expensive to correct MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company An annual sheave groove profile examination can verify if rope and sheave fit properly Without proper fit or traction one sacrifices rope or sheave life expectancy
245. on techniques than Parallel designs Point Contact ropes are better able to handle the intense pressures present in installations utilizing multiple deflection sheave placements or in high rise and medium rise elevators where close sheave placements are planned For further deails see our TechTalk article titled PARALLEL CLOSING VS STANDARD Strand A strand consists of one or more layers of wire closed in a helical pattern surrounding an interior central component Type of Lay Brugg Wire produces both Regular Lay right hand ropes and Lang Lay right hand rope to fit individual client traction needs The term Regular Lay design means that the actual wires found in a particular rope are arranged to run in the same direction parallel that the rope actually lays or runs Lang Lay wires wires cross a rope s center axis at an angle and the strands appear to spiral diagonally around the rope Normally ordinary lay ropes are simpler to mount and have less of a tendency to untwist when standing free in a shaft while Lang lay ropes exhibit a tendency to provide Phone US 1 706 235 6315 e Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0208 6 27 Maintenance 6 28 be
246. on walk the rope away from the reel while a second person keeps enough tension on the reel to prevent slack in the rope Uncoil the entire length of rope and allow it to lay in a straight line When rope is laid over a sheave it should bend in the same manner as when originally wound Rope must never be dragged over an edge corner or dirty floor NEVER lubricate governor rope 3 40 Manual 42 02 01 MCE Elevator Packages Safety Adjustment Safety Adjustment A Caution Guide rail faces must be clean free of oil paint rust or other contaminants This is EXTREMELY important Safeties are installed on the bottom of the safety plank and coupled together at the factory Safety plank safeties and sheave plank sheaves are shipped as a unit Centering setback Safety to safety relating linkage and stopping pressure slide distance are all adjustable in the field if necessary A Danger Safeties must be properly adjusted to ensure they will function as required in emergencies Figure 3 35 Hollister Whitney Type B Flexible Guide Clamp Safeties The safety is preset to provide 3 16 clearance between the safety jaws and the side surface of the rail blade The safety is also adjusted to provide the designated slide distance in accordance with A17 1 CSAB44 requirements However actual field conditions and variation in car weights and configuration may require that the safeties be readjusted in the fie
247. ons and Maintenance Periodic maintenance is critical to machine operation Monthly nspect visually Check for wear debris lubricant leakage and any evidence of heating or abnormal operation e Clean using a dry cloth If compressed air is used it must be dry and not over 30 PSI Check for proper brake operation Semi Annually Complete all monthly checks Check brake shoe lining and clearance Adjust if necessary Check all brake pivot bearings Lubricate brake shoe pins Check groove wear and cable tension Lubricate machine per instructions Handling If possible lift machine as a single unit Anchor lifting sling at each eyebolt Use spreader bars to prevent damage Storage Storein warm dry clean location Protect from dust and dirt particularly concrete dust which can penetrate bearing fits Extended Storage Brake pins brake drum sheave and solenoid parts are coated with a rust preventative oil before shipment Shields are placed between the brake shoes and the braking surface to protect the brake linings If the machine is stored beyond thirty days Storein sealed waterproof enclosure with appropriate dehydrating sachet Periodically check and re Iubricate protected parts if needed If necessary remove any rust with a fine abrasive paper before relubricating Do not allow oil or solvent on brake linings 6 50 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Drivi
248. ontrol room space cleanliness environment Proper linkages condition Rail clearance 7 8 Rope lubrication Ride car leveling accuracy ride quality Rope condition Rope dry and clean Rope unobstructed Linkages gears pins bushings latches Check switches and reset mechanism Visual damage distortion check Governor and tension weight sheaves All fastenings secure Rails clean and rust free Rail lubrication Visual check alignment fastenings Visual check roller guides Roller guide lubrication General Doors Machine Buffers Guide Rails Overspeed suspension Safeties Controller Governor Rope 70 Pit switches Rope diameter condition data tag Governor structure lubrication 22 Check oil level or springs correctly seated Check brake lining adjust if required Lubricate machine brake pins bearings Check clean lubricate door operator Technician Nameorlnitials State Install 2 Log Year Every Six Months Minimum JRoetesn 0 0 j j jJ pq j J Bldg Addr JAN FEB MAR JUN AUG NOV __ j J j j jJ J _ Elevator Description Additional v 0 P 2 O c O Q O a 2
249. or con tractor 7 The control space door shall be labeled MRL Elevator Control Space 8 Apermanent light fixture and switch conforming to local elevator code shall be installed in the control space 9 AGFCI protected convenience outlet conforming to local elevator code shall be installed in the control space 10 A separate 120 volt 20 amp fused grounded service with a GFCI protection shall be provided for car lighting and power 1 7 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 11 A dedicated telephone line is to be terminated in the elevator controller cabinet 12 A permanent means of communication between the control space and the car shall be provided if the control space is separate from the hoistway See A17 1 2007 section 2 7 8 A Caution Elevator equipment is not designed to be exposed to the weather Equipment must be in a dry pro tected area 32 to 104 degrees Fahrenheit Moisture must not condense on equipment If conditions are not adequate consult MCE about special NEMA rated enclosures Package Description amp Site Readiness 1 8 Manual 42 02 EP01 Elevator Packages Storage Conditions Storage Conditions A clean dry secure storage area must be provided Iron work machines and controllers will be damaged by exposure to the elements Safety and Code Compliance Elevator equipment must be installed by personnel with the proper certification for each facet of the j
250. or operation and door safety devices 6 54 gt Check alignment of drive and driven sheaves Check for unusual wear Check for proper brake application and brake surface contact 6 50 gt Check machine lubrication 6 50 gt Monthly Check for excessive dust or moisture Check for proper status indicator operation Check for fault indication examine fault logs Check for loose connections Clean machine room or space Check for visible damage 6 5 gt Car Counterweight Safeties Check for proper linkages 6 5 gt Check rail clearances 6 5 gt Check for proper lubrication 70 gt Check sheave alignment Suspension Rope Connections Ride test for car vibration Visually check for signs of wear 69 gt 73 gt Verify no missing or broken isolation springs Check governor rope is dry and clean NEVER lubricate governor rope Check governor is unobstructed 92 gt 100 gt Check linkages gears pins collars bushings latches 92 gt 100 gt Speed Governor Manually operate switches and reset mechanism 92 gt 100 gt Check for damage or distortions to structure 92 gt 100 gt Check governor and sheave grooves 92 gt 100 gt Check fastenings are secure 92 gt 100 gt Visually check that rails are clean and rust free 6 43 gt Clean if needed 6 43 gt Visually check rail alignment and fastenings 6 43 gt Guide adjustment 6 43 gt Visually check oil bu
251. orten a rope s life span Prior to cutting tightly double seize Use Triple seizing with parallel design ropes such as DP9 or HRS on either side where the cut is to be made It is suggested that the length of each seizing should be at a minimum equal to the rope s diameter with each seizing spaced approximately six rope diameters apart For ease of use and efficiency we recommend using a glass fiber reinforced self adhesive tape rather than a soft or annealed wire to seize ends though this permissible as well ELECTRICAL OR DUCT TAPE FOR SEIZING ENDS IS NOT ACCEPTABLE While fusing ends is an additional option with steel core ropes after double seizing and cutting it is clearly unacceptable for sisal core or man made fiber core ropes due to the destructive nature of high heat upon the fibers Sheave Composition And Wire Hardness Friction sheaves are normally made of GG25 to GG30 cast iron with various alloying additions Rarely they are offered in GGG 50 60 modular cast iron Generally the hardness of a sheave is between 200 and 270 HB Brinell Hardness Such hardness is required to ensure both sufficient service life and dimensional stability of the rope grooves in heavy duty friction sheaves Deflection pulleys HB N mm 575 2000 E 1800 7 E 1600 425 1400 375 1200 325 1000 275 225 800 175 600 Sheqve Hardened special Wire m Sheave Hardened regular Table shows relationship betwe
252. osi tion The gas chamber is permanently sealed The oil chamber must be filled after the shipping retainer is removed and the buffer is extended at the site Dip stick The dip stick is topped with a wing nut Lightly tightening the wing nut secures the dip stick and seals against possible contamination After installing and extending the buffer remove the dip stick and fill the buffer with the proper hydraulic oil Thereafter check oil level using the dip stick A Caution Buffer oil is not provided due to transportation of hazardous materials restrictions Buffer oil must be purchased locally Oil buffer design and size vary depending on service load and car speed The buffer is shipped with an instruction sheet that you should read explaining oil type and how to check oil level Additionally the label on the buffer lists its service rating You should check this to see that the buffer is correct for the application See type and volume tables page 3 23 A Danger When you release the piston after installing an oil buffer it will extend very quickly Keep clear to avoid injury After initial oil fill wait a half hour or so and re check level Spring Buffers Spring buffer stroke is determined by the height of the buffer base in the interior of the spring Permanently attached buffer tags provide the stroke information which may be checked with a simple measurement from the top of the spring to the top of the restriction tube B
253. ouu S o29uM xis Aq puy sjuedn220o sii pue qe Ajjed1d Aj uey Je suonipuo2eui e uequnisip YUM 53 S1030UJ 21 JO speo pue SWdY 241 papuaju sbuueaq sayi eds 2613 sn 1 5 Jo sie SHV3A p uBi esiuu 1340 4915 01 epin6 ayy ebueiJ uoneoijdde ay spu 1x pue Ayjenb 1D nGaOtd dIHSOV14 YNO LI 34V JONVY Q3aGN31X3 AllllgVvund 3GlH HOIVAd13 AYLSNGNI YOLVAJ13 N338 SVH AGIND Y41104 V 13 3H 5913 01 0 9 91 6 O 9L Ze BY 195 531051 159q 104 Z 91 slenb uan n u2e3 910 2 WIN Ol sIA1sOd 2 Uod siu 1 Z dais ui Jaysem do s pijos 3281002 se euu 1 hun asIMyDO I epin6 19 0J 1uaunsnfpe 1 jas 104 Z1 t sdeis yeaday uoneuuoJui 1294 104 Lc days S 29UM peddinbe sapinb 5 Alquu sse we epis Jo JOY 12111581 JOU SM DS 2
254. panels When assembling check the construction drawings and make certain corners are properly located Hand rail mounting areas are reinforced 2 with hand rail panel steel If MCE standard hand rails are provided mounting holes are pre drilled 4 24 Manual 42 02 EP01 Elevator Packages Cab Assembly Figure 4 22 Wall Panel Side View Detail with Interior Panel 14 GA PAINT LOC FORMED CAB SHELL WALL WALL PANEL CLIPS 1 4 20 NUT AND BOLT FOR SHELL WALL FLANGES FIRE RESISTANT WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH FIRE RESISTANT PARTICLE BOARD VENT SLOT VENT COVER REVEAL 4 STAINLESS STEEL OR OTHER a A A NN NN s __ 6 FLOORING OTHERS d 14 GA FOOT ANGLE TO INSIDE OF CAR 2 10 FLAT HEAD WOOD SCREW 1 PLATFORM PLYWOOD DETAIL WALL PANEL SHELL 4 25 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Corner Panels The cab shell corner panels are sized as required to achieve the correct cab dimensions when used with the standard width wall panels When setting up the cab it is critical to check the cab dimensions and place the corners in the correct locations Single entrance cars have two corners one at each corner of the back of the cab Front Strike and Transom connect to the flanges on the front most wall panels Through cars have no corners
255. passengers can exit the car Once passengers have been alerted an elevator technician will access the rescue panel located in the elevator controller e When the key switch is moved to the RESCUE position the safety string is opened and the motor is disconnected from the drive The motor windings are electrically shorted together so that it will provide resistance to motion electrical braking when the machine brakes are lifted The battery will provide 12 volt power to the rescue system Figure 5 2 Rescue Assist Control Panel GOVERNOR RESCUE CONTROL PANEL PUSH BOTH RELEASE BRAKE P NORM N _ s The LCD screen will display the hoistway wall visible to the car mounted camera When both BRAKE RELEASE buttons are simultaneously pressed the inverter will pro vide power to lift the machine brakes and the car will drift slowly about 10 feet per min ute up or down the hoistway depending upon the weight of the car versus the weight of the counterweight Asthenext hoistway sign moves into view the technician waits until the horizontal line on the LCD screen is centered between the two horizontal lines on the hoistway sign then releases the BRAKE RELEASE buttons The brakes will drop and the car will stop in the leveling zone Rescue personnel can now manually open the doors and allow the passengers to exit The battery and inverter can provide about 10 minutes of active brake lift
256. pe Table 3 2 Hydraulic Buffer Specifications _ NEGET _ USG liters Buffer Switch Adjustment Piston compression of 1 2 inch 13mm must cause the switch to open 1 Attach an ohm meter across the switch leads 2 Compress the buffer 1 2 inch 3 Verify that the switch opens 4 Adjust as needed 3 23 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Car Roller Guide nstallation MCE Freedom elevators use Elsco car and counterweight roller guides The roller guide assem blies are generally attached to the safeties on the car bottom and to the crosshead assembly on the car top Roller guide model and roller composition vary depending upon car speed and capacity Check the MCE construction drawings for model and wheel composition per location Figure 3 22 Typical Bottom Roller Guide Assembly Typical bottom roller guide mounting to Mn dE safety Check the construction drawings 287 to see if there is an adapter plate ACC between the roller guide and safety for Am the job Top roller guides are mounted on the top of the crosshead and gener ally use a debris shield provided to protect the rollers 1 Refertothe construction drawings and to the guide manufacturer instruction sheet 2 Install the roller guide assemblies as shown taking care that they are exactly level side to side and front to back and that the center roller is centered and square on the rai
257. prior coordination MCE will arrange for the necessary materials to be delivered early Rail I nstallation e Place car and counterweight pit channels Construct a target assembly in the pit for guide rail installation plumb wires Construct an overhead target assembly for guide rail installation plumb wires e Install plumb wires from overhead target assembly to pit target assembly and tension properly with weights or traction devices Create a matrix that notes measurements from the car and counterweight guide rail installation wires to the walls or beams at each floor Fromthe matrix dimensions determine that the hoistway is the correct size and is within 1 inch of plumb per 100 feet of rise Guide rail installation wires can be pulled very slightly to accommodate minor discrepancies in measurements More serious dimen sion problems will have to be corrected by the General Contractor Install the first guide rail brackets for car and counterweight at pit level e Install the first round of car and counterweight guide rails Be sure to reference Con struction Drawings Cut starter rails may be required e Build the false car with the suspension cable securely attached to the overhead e Work up the hoistway continuing to install car and counterweight guide rail brackets and guide rails as you rise e When the last round of guide rails are installed at the top of the hoistway tram the guide rails on
258. r Wheel Options Below 22 4 EF04131 Lock Washer 23 1 18328 Solid Stop Washer 24 1 18326 Adjustable Stop Adjustment Screw 25 1 18330 Lock Washer 26 1 EA18329 Nut Standard Roller Wheel Configuration for Typical Installations 12 4 18359 Standard Neoprene Roller Wheel Assembly 6 in 152mm 21 2 EA18359 Standard Neoprene Roller Wheel Assembly 6 in 152mm Polyurethane Roller Wheel Configuration for Heavy Duty Installations 12 4 mEA18347 Polyurethane Roller Wheel Assembly 6 in 152mm Rail Side 21 2 mEA18348 Polyurethane Roller Wheel Assembly 6 in 152mm Rail Face ELS CO 5 USER MANUAL Upper amp Lower Rope SU RPM 0 7800 Ibf Contact Surfaces 1 4 3 4 in NOTE See Reverse Side For Important Details On Selecting Desired Rope Type and Units Measuring Mode LL I First turn adjustment dial counterclockwise to open plug gauge you hear a STEP 3 STEP 4 om a 5 F DO NOT Now turn dial STOP perform counterclockwise repeated 1 to remove rope jobs from RPM at the same rope position Turn adjustment dial clockwise to mm close plug gauge AMEN OR Keep turning until Your diameter is now displayed in metric or imperial units Continue to turn ad
259. r are in their respective separate grounded conduits Refer to con struction drawings and to elevator job prints for grounding instruction This equipment may contain voltages as high as 1000 volts Use extreme caution Do not touch any components resistors circuit boards power devices or electrical connections without ensuring that high voltage is not present I n This Manual This manual is the installation guide for the MCE elevator package When viewed online as a pdf file hyperlinks buttons or blue text link to related topics and informational websites The manual includes Contents Table of Contents When viewed online as a pdf file hyperlinks in the Contents link to the associated topic in the body of the manual Section 1 Package Description and Site Readiness Section 2 Overhead and Rails Section 3 Platform and Hoistway Section 4 Entrances Car and Positioning System Section 5 Operation Preinspection OEM inclusions section 6 Maintenance Index Alphabetical index to help you find information in the manual When viewed online as a pdf file index entry page references are hyperlinks to the associated informa tion in the body of the manual Review the following documents MCE Freedom Installation and Maintenance this document MCE Motion 4000 or iControl Controller manual as appropriate Elevator Machine manual MCE Construction Drawings MCE Assembly Drawings MCE Controller J ob Prints Elevator Ca
260. r is responsible for understanding and applying all current local state provincial and federal codes that govern practices such as controller placement applicability wiring protection disconnections over current protection and grounding procedures Equipment is at line voltage when AC power is connected Never operate controls with covers removed from drive or brake controls After AC power has been removed internal capacitors can remain charged for up to 5 min utes Wait at least 5 minutes after power down before touching any internal components To prevent the risk of shock all equipment should be securely grounded to earth ground as described in the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes Ground conduc tors should be as large or larger than the primary AC power feeders for the equipment Failure to obtain an actual earth ground may result in electrical shock to personnel When using test equipment oscilloscopes etc with a power cord that electrically ties probe common to earth ground an isolation transformer should be used to isolate the instrument common from earth ground 1 9 Package Description amp Site Readiness Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company 1 10 Manual 42 02 01 VN CLR ADR AC MeE Motion Control Engineering Overhead and Rails A Kinetek Company In this section This section describes hoistway installations including Structure Overvie
261. rake Adjustment Data Plate The brake setting and method of measurement is required to be permanently and legibly marked on the driving machine Please refer to ASME 17 1 2007 CSA 44 07 Requirement 2 24 8 5 Ambient Air Requirements The temperature and humidity range that must be maintained in order to ensure safe and nor mal operation of the elevator must be permanently posted in the machine space and in the con trol room Please refer to ASME 17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 7 9 2 Warning sign for Work Areas A sign must be prominently posted in work areas inside the hoistway in the pit in the car and on the car top warning of the dangers of unexpected car movement and instructing the mechanic to engage the car locking bolt before maintaining or inspecting the brake emergency brake or controller Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirements 2 7 5 2 7 5 1 2 e 5 8 Manual 42 02 EPO1 MCE Elevator Packages I nstalling Data Plates and Safety Signs Warning sign for Governor inside the Hoistway Where a governor is located inside the hoistway a warning sign stating Secure car against movement before servicing the governor must be prominently posted and be visible from the governor Please refer to ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Requirement 2 7 6 3 4 Danger Low Clearance Sign Any area in the pit outside the refuge space where vertical clearance is less than 24 inches must be clearly marked on the pit
262. rally stretch to some degree However special attention must be made paid to be sure that the amount of elongation stays within a predetermined acceptable range Generally a fiber core rope will stretch more than ropes using steel mixed or synthetic cores Constructional stretch permanent stretch develops over time with the greatest amount occurring during the initial weeks and months of operation Brugg assumes that hoist ropes are to be used under normal conditions with loads not exceeding 10 of the Minimum Breaking Load or MBL A wide range of factors affect constructional stretch such as the design of the installation hoist rope length acceleration and deceleration of the elevator types of groove profiles actual load range in reference to the MBL the twisting of ropes during installation and tensioning In some installations a major amount of the rope stretch may occur within a few days or even a week after installation Fatigue When individual hoist rope wires lose their ability to bend the result is rope fatigue and wire breaks This is caused by some sort of constraint that prevents the wires from moving freely and working in harmony with each other Often it is an indication of either high rope bending stresses excessive stress placed upon loaded rope wires while they bend over a sheave All ropes are subject to fatigue and abrasion Nicking and other forms of damage such as kinking can accelerate this condition Us
263. rent Motion 4000 Typically only two mechanical limits Final Limit Switches are installed Other switches Terminal Slowdowns etc are virtual switches placed in software and referenced to the positioning system tape iControl With iControl an MCE TLS C cartop mounted limit switch system is provided along with two mechanical final limit switches In all cases refer to MCE Controller drawings job prints for limit switch information 3 8 Manual 42 02 1 Elevator Packages Sling Platform Assembly Car Sill Apron and Flooring Figure 3 9 Car Sill Apron and Flooring Installation Detail Sill Bolt to front of sill T Finshflon 4 NSSNNSNNNNNY Sub flooring Finished floor height as Indicated on approved i MM construction drawings os Apron Apron struts 2 Note that additional back braces are also used to prevent p the apron from distorting from unintentional impact The apron is typically attached with bolts and nuts to the front of the struts that in turn bolt to tapped holes in the platform frame Nickel silver sills will mount differently due to extrusion differences See your final construction drawings 1 Attach the struts for the toe guard Attach them with the open sides facing one another Attach the toe guard across the outer face of the struts bolts into the strut fronts nuts inside the struts Figure 3 10 Apron Assembly S
264. riction or traction sheave are too large the rope will slip and this will result in groove damage However should the grooves in a sheave be too narrow the rope will be exposed to higher lateral pressures which in turn leads to rope fatigue and failure In either case shortened service life can result in costly downtime repair or total sheave replacement Brugg recommends the close inspection of hardened sheaves and their replacement or reconditioning should they deviate from nominal dimensions In addition Brugg recommends the total replacement of all unhardened sheaves and full sets of ropes during maintenance Replacement ropes are always larger in diameter than used ropes possessing an upper tolerance range and consequently cannot settle into the existing deeper or narrower traction sheave groups created by the constant friction between the sheave and the previous rope set The larger diameter of a replacement rope can lead to unequal tensioning of all the ropes resulting in an individual new rope carrying more weight while others carry less Such an imbalance can create rope sets that travel unequal distances at a constant speed which can lead to severe sheave wear Careful sheave inspection reveals that over time grooves become slightly deeper and narrower as they adapt to the abrasive force exerted by hoist ropes Consequently it s easy to understand why the replacement of a single rope is rarely
265. rn optional Your equipment may be different Please review cab construction drawings carefully 4 23 MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Entrances Car and Positioning System Cab Shell Panels The cab shell wall panels are fixed width standard panels The corner panels are shaped and sized as needed to achieve the wall length required The roof canopy is designed to support car top electronics and an inspection operation station Cab Shell Wall Panels Wall panels are fixed width Each panel is vented top and bottom Panels may be unpainted steel stainless or powder coated depending upon cab interior requirements Figure 4 20 Powder coated Wall Panel flange at the top of each panel bends outward providing a slotted flange to secure the canopy panels The side flanges bend outward allowing the panels to be bolted The flange at the bottom of each panel together using the 1 4 x 20 hardware bends inward providing a slotted flange to provided secure the car to the wooden platform surface using flat head screws provided with cab Figure 4 21 Wall Panel Exterior Reinforcement for Hand Rail Mounting Pe The side flanges of each wall panel bend outward allowing the panels to be bolted together using the 1 4 x 20 hardware provided Corner panels are not standard width They are specially shaped to provide the correct dimensions when used with the standard wall
266. rnings and place barriers as required 3 Using the key switch in the car place the car on ACCESS Move to a Safe position in the hallway and use the hoistway access switch to move the car down to the access limit Using the car top switch place the car on car top INSPECTION Observing all safety precautions step onto the car top Use car top controls to move the elevator up adjacent to the car locking device Engage the locking bolt in the center of the bolt hole in the receiver This will activate a switch opening the safety circuit and preventing the car from moving m The car is now prevented from moving by the locking device Reverse the above steps to return the car to normal service when maintenance is complete Figure 5 1 Car Locking Bolt Use Lift slide and set to lock the car in position Cartop Access While the locking bolt is engaged you may access the cartop through the escape hatch Be sure to have a step ladder positioned appropriately in the car and a second step ladder in the hall for safe exit and re entry 5 2 Manual 42 02 1 Elevator Packages MRL Manual Passenger Rescue Assist System MRL Manual Passenger Rescue Assist System When commercial power is lost it is assumed that elevator personnel will establish communi cation with any passengers trapped in the car and let them know that the car will be safely moved to a floor where the doors will be manually opened and the
267. rom being induced in the encoder circuit We recommend you use oversize 2 inch conduit to route the encoder cable so that you do not have to remove end con nectors which may void the warranty I solation Transformer if required Install and wire the isolation transformer as shown in the controller prints for the job 3 52 Manual 42 02 01 iz e 8 do iu AS iy ALA Ae af ZA I Motion Control Engineering Entrances Car and Positioning System A Kinetek Company In this section This section provides installation information for 4 Hall Entrances and Doors 4 2 gt Elevator cab assembly 4 23 gt Cartop hand rail 4 45 gt Cartop Station 4 45 gt Doors and Hatch Door Equipment 4 47 gt Hall Stations 4 47 gt Car Operating Panel 4 47 gt Rescue Assist System 4 48 gt Entrances car doors and cab assembly information in this section relate to the units typically used in MCE packages Occasionally job specifications require that different entrances doors or cab assemblies be used In these cases the installation drawings will provide accurate infor mation In all instances installation drawings are the controlling documents and should be fol lowed if any question arises 4 1 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompan 000 Hall Entrances and Doors If you are using car as a sill template the guide rails must be properly aligned so that t
268. rt or call an ELSCO guide specialist to determine proper applications See our Frequently Asked Questions FAQ for more information about the trade offs between neoprene and polyurethane wheel compositions Cover plate kits are in stock and available for added safety and protection Seismic retainer plates are available for select rail sizes Call or e mail for more information Model D Roller Guide Key Req Part Description 1 1 002001 2 1 ED02004 Face Arm 3 1 ED02002 Left Side Arm 4 1 ED02003 Right Side Arm 5 13 02006 Pivot Pin 6 3 02005 Wheel Stud 7 3 EC18440 Wheel Stud Lock Washer 8 13 Roller Wheel See Roller Wheel Options Below 9 3 02007 5 Arm Stud 10 3 EC18424 Side Face Arm Spring 11 3 EC18421 Flat Washer 12 3 EC18422 Locknut 13 3 ED02008 Rubber Washer 14 6 EC18387 Set Screw Standard Roller Wheel Configuration for Typical Installations 8 3 EC18405 Standard Neoprene Roller Wheel Assembly 3 25 in 83mm Polyurethane Roller Wheel Configuration for Heavy Duty Installations B 3 EC18441 Polyurethane Roller Wheel Assembly 3 25 in 83mm Notes Top Level Assembly for Model D Roller Guide with Std Neoprene Rollers is 002000 Top Level Assembly for Model D Roller Guide with Polyurethane Rollers is 002022 ELSCo 0091 sq
269. rted in the counterweight frame in one or more stacks each retained by a tab in the C channel slot Each stack has an independent lock down retention assembly Refer to construction drawings to see if starter weights are used prior to stacking remaining weights 1 Insertthe correct number of fillers in the counterweight frame to achieve the counter weight percentage indicated on the construction drawings 2 Apply pressure to lock down angles so that there is good contact between angles and stack Lock angles in place using hardware and rail clips as shown 4 Oncethe car and counterweight have been properly balanced secure the lock down angles in place by drillingthrough the counterweight frame and the angle and using 1 2 bolts nuts and lock washers provided to prevent any possibility of the stack shifting See the illustration below for drill locations 5 Finally tighten and lock the filler tensioning jack bolts on the top surfaces of the lock down angles to prevent noise or vibration from the filler stacks o Figure 3 19 Counterweight Lock down and Fillers Tension jack bolts for additional vertical retention of filler stacks After final balancing drill and bolt through counterweight vertical bar and hold down angle Angles on both inner and outer sides of stack 3 20 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Counterweight Installation Counterweight Guards Refer to the following illustra
270. rtop Handrail Steel handrail components are provided with every job Handrails are intended to help prevent falls from the cartop A Danger Never climb on handrails They are not intended to bear weight and may collapse or deform allowing injury or death due to a fall or contact with hoistway structures 4 45 Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 000 Cartop Station Cartop equipment includes the cartop inspection operation station the positioning system the video rescue camera the door operator and the cartop interface box connections to from the elevator controller This section describes installing the inspection operation station and the camera For positioning system installation please refer to the manual for the controller used on the job For door operator installation see Door Operator and Hatch Door Equipment on page 4 47 and the door operator manual For cartop interface box installation refer to the elevator controller manual Figure 4 48 Cartop Inspection Operation Station Typical cartop inspection station The station shipped with the order may be different depending on hoistway NEMA requirements and job requirements 1 Install the cartop inspection station as shown in the MCE construction drawings or as site conditions warrant 2 Wirethe cartop inspection station as shown in the controller drawings package 4 46 Manual 42
271. ructions for positioning system load weigher Configuration and adjustment instructions for controller drive Diagnostics and troubleshooting infor mation for controller and connected equipment Will be delivered with controller Machine Instruction Technical information about the machine Will be delivered with machine Door Operator Install instructions for door operator Delivered with operator Options Depending on the specific option it may be documented in the elevator control ler manual or in a stand alone manual accompanying the option 1 3 MeE Package Description amp Site Readiness Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Optional Equipment Available options include Serial Car Operation Panel Interface Circuit board or boards usually mounted in the con trol panel that serialize button and switch inputs from the car operating panel allowing the information to be communicated to the elevator control or dispatcher through a shielded serial cable rather than through numerous discrete wires Serial Hall Calls Multiple node boards one per hall call panel Node boards are con nected along a serial bus The benefit is again reduced wiring requirements Seismic sensor Detects horizontal and vertical accelerations associated with earth move ments signals controller and sounds a warning Counterweight derailment detector Ring and string counterweight derailment detector signals controller if counterweig
272. s required for the cars being installed Compensation attachment points are indicated on the MCE construction drawings Allow 36 inches 1 m 3 48 Manual 42 02 EP01 Elevator Packages Balancing the Car Balancing the Car Hoistway machine performance is specified to a particular load car equipment and passengers and to a specified offset to the load through counterweighting Balancing the car is important to performance and ride characteristics 1 Placea balanced load in the car specified percentage of full load typically 4096 but sometimes 45 or 50 2 On Machine Room Inspection run the car to the middle of the hoistway position may be learned by performing a counterweight learn procedure Turn controller power OFF 4 Usea portable supply to inject sufficient DC voltage at controller terminals B1 B2 to lift the brake Or manually lift the brake 5 Watch the car to see if it drifts If not the car and counterweight are balanced If the car drifts up remove weight from the counterweight or add weight to the car and repeat the balancing procedure If the car drifts down add weight to the counterweight or remove weight from the car and repeat the balancing procedure 6 When car and counterweight are balanced record the actual weight in the car for future reference Balanced load Ibs 7 Restore controller power 3 49 Motion Control Engineering A Ki
273. s to ensure they are Securely fastened in place both buffers and stands Vertical and aligned with striker plates on car and counterweight That the buffer marking plates are in place and correctly describe the buffer That there is no evidence of fluid leakage That the extended buffer is the correct height Table 6 6 Buffer Oil Tellus Oil 68 Rando oil HDC 68 These hydraulic oils meet ISO VG 68 requirements 6 44 Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance Car and Counterweight Buffers Maintenance Spring buffers require no maintenance Hydraulic buffers must be extended and filled with oil before use and the oil level periodically checked thereafter Figure 6 1 Hydraulic Buffer Restrainer i Buffer switch Z Dip Stick Manufacturer data plate Restrainer Allows the buffer to be held in a compressed position during shipment Once a buffer is mounted in place the restrainer is released to allow the buffer to extend See Danger below A Danger Buffer may extend quickly Keep out of the way Dip stick The dip stick is topped with a wing nut Lightly tightening the wing nut secures the dip stick and seals against possible contamination After installing and extending the buffer you remove the dip stick and fill the buffer with the proper hydraulic oil Thereaf ter you can check oil level using the dip stick After initial fill allow the buffer to sit for thirty minutes be
274. safety As part of Brugg Wire Rope s continuing efforts towards increasing the industry s level of knowledge and awareness in proper technique and procedure we offer a summation of relevant guidelines and changes to previous ASME materials ASME A17 1 2004 and CSA B44 04 detailing areas we deem vital This is offered as a courtesy to all professionals but should not be construed as a substitute for consulting a full edition of ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 which contains full requirements for elevators escalators dumbwaiters moving walks material lifts and dumbwaiters with automatic transfer devices The materials quoted herein will remain current with occasional addenda until 2010 As most are aware ASME guidelines are typically packed with minute detail making them at times tedious to read and hard for even the most experienced professional to follow readily In order to make it easier for users to locate relevant topics each section offers brief summations of ASME materials providing a useful overview of each section It is our hope that the information provided will be of interest and prove useful to you in your efforts ONLY ROPES CLASSIFIED AS ELEVATOR ROPES SHALL BE USED IN INSTALLATIONS AND UPON THEIR REPLACEMENT SHOULD NEVER BE REUSED ASME A17 1 2007 CSA B44 07 Part 2 Electric Elevators Section 2 20 Suspension Ropes and their Connections 2 20 1 Suspension Means Elevator cars shall be suspended by ste
275. sceptible to uncontrolled twisting during the installation process To guard against this Brugg offers Brugg i LINE a unique feature applied to our elevator ropes during manufacture permitting easy detection of twisted ropes At installation note the i LINE during a complete run and then count the number of complete turns of the i LINE about the axis of the rope A maximum of 2 3 rotations is acceptable in 30m or 100 ft of travel distance on Brugg 8x19 Sisal Core Ropes while a maximum of only one rotation is acceptable with Brugg DP9 or HRS ropes This applies to 1 1 installations with the amount being doubled for 2 1 installations A correction is recommended if the number of rotations exceeds this guideline Turn the end fittings on top of the car 1 1 in the appropriate direction to remove twisting Usually this is in the direction that is closing the rope If a large twist in the rope is found after corrections review your equipment geometry traction sheave and pulley alignments VEDAS Las SEE N O a f f NOTE ropes should be secured to prevent untwisting both during and following installation INSTALLATION We recommend the use of appropriate and well maintained Rope Pulling Grips to prevent build up or the transfer of rope torque Additional methods including the use of Reeving Splices are also per
276. scribed for Type safeties J aw pressure is not adjustable but you may need to adjust the length of the relating rod to ensure that the jaws of both safeties engage the guide rail at the same moment This will be very important to avoid platform racking because Type A safeties do not allow the car to slide instead they stop it immediately 3 43 MeE kii Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Temporary Run Box If itis necessary to use a temporary run box to run the platform during construction the follow ing illustration shows the required connections for the Motion 4000 controller Include safety string elements already installed Refer to the iControl manual for information about wiring a temporary run box for that controller A Caution For safety keep the controller Machine Room Inspection switch in the INSP position while the temporary run box is in use If a jumper was installed between HC CTL board terminals SAFC and SAFH it must be removed when the temporary run box is connected Figure 3 37 Temporary Run Box Car Machine Room Temporary Run Box HC CTL Board ESC Traveler SAFC PMT Strip om 15 GOS2 NORM ENABLE d SY ICTU UP DOWN KM db G ICTD e INCT L Jumper 9 Run Box Wire Optional Jumper A Danger See Danger Below Wire the temporary run box as shown for safe operation The jumper from 2 bus to INCP prevents the car from reverting t
277. ss relieved Rod Rolled or forged steel ASI M 668 Wedge Cast steel ASTM A27 Grade 60 30 Standard Finish Galvanized Runby and Clearances After replacing shortening or tensioning ropes check all roping clearances against data plates and original installation drawings Refer to the manual for the controller Motion 4000 or iControl and run those tests that assure the sheave will break traction when car or counterweight is on its associated buffer Rope Application BRUGG HOIST ROPE QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE GU A DE REFERENCIA DE CABLE DE IZAR BRUGG 8X19 CLASS Danes BRUGG TIPO 8X19 Di metro Nominal Strength Resistencia Nominal Rope Weight Peso del cable Traction Tracci n EHS CLASS INCLUDES 8 X 25 SINE ELE 1 4 in 6 3 mm 3600 Ibs 4500 Ibs 0 09 Ibs ft 0 13 kg m 5 16 in 8 0 mm 5600 Ibs 6900 Ibs 0 15 Ibs ft 0 22 kg m 3 8 in 9 5 mm 8200 Ibs 9900 Ibs 0 20 Ibs ft 0 30 kg m 10 0 mm 10000 Ibs 12000 Ibs 0 23 Ibs ft 0 34 kg m 7 16 in 11 0 mm 11000 Ibs 13500 Ibs 0 28 Ibs ft 0 42 kg m 12 0 mm 14000 Ibs 17000 Ibs 0 34 Ibs ft 0 50 kg m 1 2 in 12 7 mm 14500 Ibs 17500 Ibs 0 39 Ibs ft 0 58 kg m 9 16 14 3 mm 18500 Ibs 22100 Ibs 0 46 Ibs ft 0 68 kg m 5 8 in 16 0 mm 23000 Ibs 27200 Ibs 0 59 Ibs ft 0 87 kg m 11 16 in 17 5 mm 27000 165 32800 165 0 69 Ibs ft 1 03 kg m 3 4 in 19 0 mm 32000 Ibs 38900 Ibs 0 82 Ibs ft 1 22 kg m 13 16 in 20 6 mm 37000 Ibs 46
278. stage Please refer to the controller manual for this information Motion 4000 or iControl as appro priate If FAILP is displayed pole position learning 15 failing In this case refer to the MCE Torqmax F5 manual for detailed information 5 5 Operation Preinspection OEM Inclusions Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany Acceptance Tests Final testing must be successfully completed and certified before the car may be turned over for normal operation Most of these tests are conducted just as with machine room installations but some are not The controller manual for the installation describes standard testing procedures Tests that must be conducted differently with machine roomless installations are described here Passenger Rescue Assist System Test Rescue Assist System Test Acceptance tests verify that a system fault will cause the car to stop at the next landing if run ning and take itself out of service 1 Disconnect the Negative terminal of the battery Place the car at a terminal landing on normal operation Press the OK button on the PLC Wait three seconds then press the ESC button on the PLC Place a call to another landing Press the 3 button on the PLC while the car is running Verify that the PLC LCD display is showing solid blocks for outputs QO and Q2 The car will run normally to the next landing Soo gt pO NM 8 Place aa call to another landing The car should not respond 9 Presst
279. t be installed Generally this takes the form of a lenoth of appropriately sized steel cable looped through the bodies of the shackle sockets and the cable ends then being clamped together with Crosby clips MCE provides two of these kits per eleva tor Figure 3 29 Anti Rotation 3 32 Manual 42 02 01 MCE Elevator Packages Car Governor Installation Car Governor Installation Governors mechanically trigger the car safeties in the event of a descending overspeed MCE Hollister Whitney governors have remote governor set and overspeed switch reset functions 120 VAC for machine room less applications Traditional machine room installations do not require remote set reset capability Governors are speed and application specific If counter weight governors are used car and counterweight governors will be clearly labeled to prevent confusing the two units A Danger Governors are supplied per specific contract speed Governors may not be substituted between jobs nor may they be modified Using the wrong governor may result in failure to remove power from the elevator machine and brake and failure to deploy the car safeties properly resulting in damage injury or death Take great care when installing testing and maintaining the governor and associated safety gear The elevator must never be oper ated without a functional governor and properly adjusted safeties in place Governor Components Primary components are the governor an
280. t contacts a rope can cause damage or wear Make adjustments to eliminate them Extreme dirt cement dust and other environmental contaminates will adversely affect hoist ropes Also be aware of humidity or A C venting into the hoistway onto the ropes as this can hurt the ropes Be sure to properly shorten or take up ropes Failure to do so can lead to rope twists tension imbalances or improper rope shackling Manual 42 02 EPO2 Motion Control Engineering MRL Maintenance Suspension Rope I nformation Lubrication New Rope Adjustment New rope must be checked and adjusted as necessary every two weeks over a period of at least two months after initial installation Six months after installation the rope shall have settled and equal tension 10 shall be possible to maintain If not the rope must be replaced Rope Replacement When rope replacement is necessary ALL suspension ropes must be replaced Replacing a sin gle rope is only allowed if a rope is damaged during initial installation When re roping a car Rope shall be as specified by the original elevator manufacturer or at least equivalent in strength weight and design Ropes must be new all from the same manufacturer and of the same material grade con struction and diameter Proper data tags shall be applied Ropes Used on MCE Elevators The470 Series machine utilizes a 10mm rope over a 15 75 sheave The 520 Series machine utilizes 1
281. ted on the MCE Shop Drawings 24 A standby power source shall be provided including necessary transfer switches and auxiliary contact where elevator operation from an alternate power supply is required 1 6 Manual 42 02 01 MCE Elevator Packages Work By Others 25 Provide 15 amp 120V AC fused service with ground supplied through automatic emer gency lighting supply if available in building connected to each elevator signal control cabinet for car lighting 26 Provide all fire alarm initiating signals as required by all national state and local codes for termination at the primary elevator signal control cabinet in each group 27 Adequate storage facilities for elevator equipment shall be provided prior to and during installation at the ground level within close proximity to the elevator hoistway 28 Installation of anchors embeds and sleeves 29 Dried in hoistway s and machine control room s Any water damage to elevator mate rials will be subject to MCE s warranty conditions 30 Sill angles if required 31 Inlocations where there is a difference in elevation between the floors of adjacent pits a metal guard is to be installed to not less than 79 abovethe level of the higher pit floor If a difference in elevation is 24 or less a standard railing is acceptable 32 Sufficient supports for machine beams including wall pockets and patching after beams are set in place Building interface and mounting of beams to be
282. teel 27 Grade 60 30 stress relieved Rod Rolled or forged steel ASTM 668 V dge Cast steel ASTM A27 Gade 60 30 Standard Finish Galvanized ESPECIFICACIONES DE LOS COMPONENTES e Casgulllo Acero fojado 2 7 Gado 60 30 estr s rdevado Acero Enrollado o fojado ASTM 668 Acero fojado ASIM A27 Gado 60 30 Cabado Est ndar Galvanizado BRUGG ISOLATION ASSEMBLY amp COMPONENTS MONTAJES DE AISLAMIENTO Y COMPONENTES Phone US 1 706 235 6315 Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com Tel fono 1 706 235 6315 Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope prugg com www bruggrope com Suspension Rope Information Brugg North America Wire Rope Wire Rope 0508 6 33 MeE Maintenance Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company BRUGG BRUGG ISOLATION ASSEMBLY amp COMPONENTS MONTAJES DE AISLAMIENTO Y COMPONENTES Part Number Size Spring Length Nom Spring QD Nom Spring 1 0 Nom Description N mero de parte Di metro Longueur C n Tige Nom Longueur Tige Ext Nom Longueur tige int Nom Descripci n PASISA38 5 16 3 8 in 8 0 10 0mm 4 7 8 in 124 mm 1 1 4 in 32 mm 11 16 in 175mm 3 8 ISOLATONASSEVBLY RAG BUSH 38 5 16 3 8 in 8 0 10 0 mm 3 8 ISCLATICN BUSHWASHER RAGJSCB
283. tenance Documents 6 1 General Information 6 4 44 4 46 46445 664 6404464444655 464 644 644 44 d d 6 2 General 5 6 2 gt 6 2 _ REPRE SU RE 6 2 6 2 Minimum Maintenance Schedule 6 3 Car and Counterweight 6 5 540 Instantaneous Safety 6 6 480 Flexible Guide Clamp Safety 6 11 Suspension Rope Information 6 15 ak uud E T 6 15 Wire Suspension and Compensating 5 6 15 Nominal Diameter Guidelines 6 16 ARIETES gt TOT TETTE 6 16 LUDUM E 6 17 New Rope Adjustment 6 17 Rope Replacement 6 17 Ropes Used on MCE 6 17 esr av TROVERAI oe esses 6 17 MODO a acc dd CROIRE 6 17
284. th 3 8 x 1 bolts and nuts Attach hanger covers to header extenson with 10 32 x 1 2 screws Attach THTG extension to Top Header extension and to hoistway wall above with Tex Screws eS Hatch Doors The door track is provided with sheaves hangers and required hardware along with installation drawings 4 10 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors National Entrances The instructions on the following pages are for National hall doors and entrances SPACE BELOW INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 4 11 MeE Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Figure 4 10 National Side Slide Exploded View 4 12 Manual 42 02 EPO1 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors BILL OF MA m lt T 2 P gt aj T 2 U T lt F DESCRIPTION HEAD JAMB RETURN JAMB STRIKE JAMB STRIKE UPRIGHT HATCH DOOR SIGHT GUARD HEADER HANGER COVER REAR UPRIGHT SILL FASCIA UPRIGHT EXTENSION UPRIGHT EXT MOUNTING BRACKETS REAR UPRIGHT BRACKET 3 4 SILL OFFSET CLIPS STEEL MAIN PARTS FIRE 3 4 OFFSET 8 LONG 10 X 1 2 FLAT HD PHLLIPS SCREWS DOOR GUIDES W SCREWS 10 X 1 2 WAFER SELF DRILLING SCREW 02 x lt Oa ea lt 10 5 16 18 X 3 4 FLANGED HEX HEAD BOLTS 5 16 18 FLANGED HEX HEAD NUTS 3 8 16 X 1 HEX HEAD BOLTS 3 8 16 FLANGED
285. th any entrapped passengers Determining how many passengers are in the car will help you know which way the car will probably drift Verify all car and hoistway doors closed and that the hoistway is clear Insert the key in the rescue panel and set it to RESCUE The LCD screen should light and display the camera s view of the hoistway If not check the unit is ON switch on side of LCD and brightness contrast adjustments on top until view is clear Simultaneously press both of the BRAKE RELEASE buttons The brakes will lift and the car will begin to drift You may want to do this just briefly at first to get a feel for how the car will move The shorted motor windings should restrict speed to about ten feet per minute Continue holding the BRAKE RELEASE buttons The camera view will give you a clear idea of car speed and direction When the door zone sign in the hoistway comes into view you may want to begin bump ing pressing and releasing the BRAKE RELEASE buttons for short durations to be cer tain you do not overshoot the door zone Move the car until the horizontal bar on the rescue panel LCD screen is centered between the horizontal door zone bars on the hoistway sign The car is now in the door zone at the indicated floor and the doors may be manually opened to release passengers switch to the NORMAL position The car will resume normal operation when commercial power is restored GOVERNOR RESCUE CONTROL PANEL o e
286. the way back down to the bottom Adjust as necessary vii Machine Platform Counterweight and Rope Install the machine beams and machine using the Construction drawings guide rails and guide rail to rope dimensions for proper alignment If three phase power is not available continue using the false car for installation If three phase power is available place the false car above and install the car and counter weight buffers safety plank sheave beam stiles crosshead platform brace rods and roller guides Install the counterweight frame and roller guides Hoist the counterweight frame to a predetermined spot in the hoistway and secure to the counterweight rail brackets with cable slings or acceptable rigging Install the hoist ropes governor governor tension sheave and governor rope Usingthe false car install sufficient counterweight fillers to counterbalance the weight of the platform and approximately 50 of a 1000 pound working capacity Consult your MCE Project Manager for weight stack count to achieve the desired work capacity Running Platform Install the elevator controller and wire to 3 phase power Wire machine encoder and brake to controller Install temporary run buttons from platform to controller provided by others Wire governor switch and safety switch in series with the Enable button Adjust the control to operate at Inspection speed Once the working platform can be moved and the governor and saf
287. tion Attach counterweight guard mounting brackets to the coun terweight rails using forged rail clips and provided hardware Mounting brackets have tapped holes to attach sheet metal guards Figure 3 20 Counterweight Guards COUNTER WEIGHT FRAME gt SIDE CWT GUARD A CWT GUARD MOUNTING BRACKETS REQUIREMENT The guard must extend from the lowest part of the coun terweight assembly when the counterweight is resting on the fully compressed buffer to a point not less than 2 100 mm 83 in and not more than 2 450 mm 96 in above the pit floor SIDE CWT GUARD FRONT CWT GUARD COUNTER WEIGHT PIT CHANNEL 3 21 MeE sicilia Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Car Buffers Install the car and counterweight buffers on their respective stands as shown in the construc tion drawings If required spring buffers may be used for slower car speeds 200 FPM and below Hydraulic buffers are required for higher speeds Ensure buffers are Mounted in the rotational orientation indicated on the construction drawings sometimes critical to proper clearance Securely fastened in place both buffers and stands Vertical and aligned with striker plates on car and counterweight That the buffer data plates are in place and correctly describe the buffer That the extended buffer is the correct height That when compressed buffer switch actuator rod
288. to within 1096 For example 1 1 2 diameter cable multiplied by 30 would indicate a loop diameter of 45 inches plus or minus 10 Figure 3 39 Round Traveler Loop Diameter Loop diameter measured from cable center to cable center Cable diameter x 30 Loop diameter 1096 Car End Connections Refer to MCE construction drawings for mechanical attachment and routing for the cable bun dle Refer to controller job prints for wiring information 3 47 Platform and Hoistway Motion Control Engineering AKinetekCompany 7 Compensation Compensation may be required on the installation to offset rope mass MCE packages use com pensating cable consisting of low carbon electrically welded chain surrounded by a metallic bead polyvinyl chloride mixture inside a flame retardant PVC jacket that resists oxidation weathering solvent and other chemicals Anti sway devices may be necessary at speeds above 350 FPM 1 8 my s Hardware U bolts S hooks etc are specially designed and rated to withstand hanging weights and movement Standard hardware may NOT be used Figure 3 40 Compensation Chain Typical I nstallation Center of Car Pullout Switch Safety U bolt S hook Cable tie Check local code for pull out switch requirements Counterweight Support Bracket 24 to 36 inches 0 6 to 1 0 m Anti sway device if needed Refer to MCE construction drawings to confirm whether or not compensation i
289. truts and apron shown not assembled 3 9 TCR S Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Apron Brace An adjustable brace is provided for the apron It is designed to be mounted in the field to accommodate clearance requirements per job One end of the brace mounts to the bottom of the platform the other to the back side of the apron Figure 3 11 Apron Brace Installation he brace adjusts trom 26 to 46 1nches Theend attaching to the platform uses a self drilling self tapping hex bolt Apron end secures with an elevator square neck bolt A 3 8 hole must be drilled 3 10 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Sling Platform Assembly Hoisting the Sling and Platform A Danger The governor must be roped and the car safeties adjusted and made operational prior to hoisting the car sling In the event of a failure e g failure of a support sling s or a free fall the governor must mechanically actuate the safeties stopping the car A Caution All employees working in the hoistway at a level greater than 6 feet above the bottom of the shaft must use fall protection consisting of a body belt harness and lanyard connected to an independent lifeline Compliance with OSHA and or governing safety authority is the responsibility of the elevator contractor Danger If
290. tter grip on nonmetallic drive sheaves a higher friction factor However Lang Lay offers certain negatives which must be considered in traction drive elevators featuring V and undercut U grooves such as a vulnerability to less than careful mounting technique increased elongation and reduced ability to handle deflection angles Warrington Construction Warrington Constructions use fewer wires compared to filler hoist rope designs and exhibit an increased capacity to be able to deal with the damaging effects of abrasion and fatigue bending A single metal element twisted into a strand with other wires creating the basic building block for all hoist ropes MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company GLOSSARY OF TERMS DIG MN Se Phone US 1 706 235 6315 e Toll free 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Tel fono E U 1 706 235 6315 e Llamada gratuita 866 54BRUGG 542 7844 e Fax 1 706 235 6035 info elevatorrope brugg com e www bruggrope com Manual 42 02 EPO2 MRL Maintenance BRUGG Suspension Rope Information TECH TIPS WEDGE SOCKET TERMINATIONS CONSEJOS TERMINACIONES DE GRILLETE DE CASQUILLOS ACUNADOS STEP 1 Insert the rope into the socket Insert the end of the wire rope down through the wedge socket body Be sure to take up slack in the rope Then thread the end of the rope back up the front side of the w
291. ue sduinq Buneuiwija 180 01 Y Moye pue Duunsue ssaud Ag 99uM uoea oul passaid sBuueaq om pue 9 00 youl ue jo 000 Suipuesnou1 ue JO 01 si Buueaq uoe3 1 5 J9 OJ 09573 Ajuo Jo JO sua pue uoneJedo Jo sued Jaye 121 SIU ui 995 AyjeoidAy uey Je suonipuoo 51010 JO speo pue uBiu 10 s o ds 09813 9sn 1u l is Jo 51 0 S13 10 pisu 89S p qnu pue ino s e insu 01 ssaJis Jepun pojoedsul 06001 1 1 pue Buipeay E30 160 seuour 200 01 puno uoisioaJd lt 19 01 029113 51005 18 1 zey uBiu ae 02613 Auo pue Ajenb jenuessa sonsuajoejeuo y auaJdoau 726511 Aug 1u9js UJOOWS e 0 1 1 K snouoBu pue jeroeds
292. uffers and bases then are matched sets stroke diameter mass and must not be mixed Switches Oil buffers have switches that must be connected to the elevator controller as shown in the con troller wiring diagrams It is imperative that switch wiring and conduit be routed so that when compressed the switch actuator rod does not impact the wiring and conduit to the switch 4 Verify that the label on the buffer matches construction drawings to be certain you are using the correct car or counterweight buffer in each location 3 13 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Figure 3 13 Buffer Examples Spring buffer mounted on a buffer stand typical Oil fill check the buffer is com pressed or if the nitrogen gas charge is lost pa buffer L m p mE rod actuates the buffer switch when E Buffer base Buffer stand if required Bracing may be provided Buffer Switch Adjustment Piston compression of 1 2 inch 13mm must cause the switch to open 1 Attach an ohm meter across the switch leads 2 Compressthe buffer 1 2 inch 3 Verify that the switch opens 4 Adjust as needed 3 14 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Counterweight Installation Counterweight Safeties If required occupied space below hoistway counterweight safeties are installed as shown in the construction drawings Typically counterweight safeties are installed between the
293. ve If the PLC is without power for more than two days it will lose time and date information and they will need to be set again 4 53 MeE Entrances Car and Positioning System Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company About the Self Test With the PLC clock properly set the automated weekly self test will begin each Sunday night at 10 00 PM The elevator will continue to run normally The test takes about one hour The test progression is Logically disconnect the charger Monitor unloaded battery voltage f voltage is sufficient conduct four minute load test while monitoring voltage If voltage remains above threshold of 11 55 volts reconnect charger conclude test If voltage falls below threshold of 11 55 volts disconnect load set battery and charger fault flags run battery charger for one hour test battery voltage above charger on voltage of 13 3 volts if 13 3 volts or more clear fault flag conclude test if less than 13 3 volts set charger fault flag conclude test If a Fault is Not Cleared If a fault is not cleared during test the PLC will wait until the test is concluded and then set the Power Transfer Input PTI input to the controller caus ingthe car to stop and remove itself from service at the next landing or the current landing if the car is not moving Initiate a Self Test You can initiate a four minute load test by pressing the OK but ton on the PLC When the test is successfully
294. w Figure 4 3 Rough Package Parts Rough Package Parts a 9 SS Wall angle used to attach struts to hoistway wall at top floor or mid floor with long rises Frame Head ON N BW Strut Extension Entrance frame UL shown Strut Standard lengths 8 amp 10 STANDARD PACKING Frame sides for each entrance boxed Frame heads may be packed together depending on width of frame Struts Strut Extensions and Wall angles banded together Each bundle may hold up to 6 floors Header Plate Sub Sill and Sill Header plate banded together Each bundle may A hold up to 6 entrances I HARDWARE SCHEDULE Aluminum Sill 2 Packet each Frame Assembly Packed in box with Frames 12 1 4 20 x 3 4 Bolts 12 1 4 20 Nuts 6 Tex Screws Packet for each Landing Packed with each set of struts Sub Sill and extensions 2 3 8 x 2 Bolts 4 3 8 x 1 Bolts 7 3 8 x 1 1 4 Bolts 13 3 8 Nuts Sill angles by others unless requested If Sill angles ordered in most cases they will be banded together in separate bundle N 4 4 Manual 42 02 01 Elevator Packages Hall Entrances and Doors Typical finish package parts complement shown below Figure 4 4 Finish Package Parts Finish Package Parts Fascia STANDARD PACKING Formed and Flat fascia up to 18 long are boxed along with hardware Extension Flat fascia longer than 18 be banded
295. w 2 2 gt Overhead Installation 2 4 gt Supporting beams 2 5 gt Machine 2 6 gt Hitch plates 2 11 gt Rail Installation 2 12 gt Materials 2 12 gt Layout 2 18 gt Pit Buffer Channels and Car Rails 2 19 gt e Counterweight Rails 2 20 gt In addition to the instructions in this manual detailed installation drawings are provided on per job basis and are always the controlling document should there be a difference between the manual and the drawings 2 1 Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Overhead and Rails Structure Overview Structural drawings for MRL2 1 and overhead machine room 2 1 are shown in this section Figure 2 1 Structure Overview MRL 2 1 Double Hoistway Governor ACPM machine Combination Bracket l Car hitch plate Car roller guides and bearing beams Car locking bolt receiver Top hanger for ELGO positioning system Final Limit switch Car apron Positioning System Encoded Tape Positioning System Counterweight Sensor Head Counterweight guard Sling and platform Governor tension sheave and weight Sheave beams Car and counter weight pit channels Buffer and stand Final Limit switch Bottom hanger for ELGO positioning system 2 2 Manual 42 02 01 MCE Elevator Packages Structure Overview Figure 2 2 Structure Overview Overhead Machine Room 2 1 Double Hoistway 5 Counterweight Hitc
296. will tighten drawing the wedge within the socket 4 Seatthe wedge firmly Let car and counterweight mass rest on ropes Rope and wedge should rise about 1 inch 2 54 mm to final set Cut rope surplus retaining about 6 inches 15 24 mm slightly more for 5 8 rope to create tail section 5 Useaminimum of two retaining clips the nearest a maximum of four times rope diam eter below the socket the next a maximum of eight times the ropes diameter See fol lowing page also 6 Slack may be adjusted by inserting a drift pin and tapping the wedge with a hammer between rope bearing and dead ends Adjust retaining clips as necessary if weight causes movement Tensioned rope must be in line with shackle rod 3 29 Platform and Hoistway Table 3 4 Rope Clip Spacing Rope Diameter Shackle to 1 Max Shackle to 2 Shackle Grounding MeE Motion Control Engineering A Kinetek Company Shackle Rope Turn to 3 Back Max Rod Rope Alignment 8 X Rope Diameter Passenger safety requires properly grounded elevator installations MCE provides a kit with an appropriate number of grounding straps One all jobs must be installed between the steel cab of the elevator and the sling stile Cab Grounding on page 4 42 a second must be installed from one of the hoist rope shackles to the counterweight hitch plate a third must be used to ground the machine when the machine is mounted on isolation pads Figure 3 27 S
297. x19 extra hightraction steel wire rope and exceed ASME A17 1 Rule 2 20 9 and all other applicable safety codes COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS Socket Cast steel 27 Grade 60 30 stress relieved Rod Falled or forged steel ASM 668 Cast steel ASTM A27 Gade 60 30 Standard Finish Galvanized El m todo m s comun de asegurar los extremos del cable en la instalaci n utiliza un casquillo acufiado Este m todo utiliza un casquillo especialmente dise ado para recibir un cable que forma una vuelta adentro y despu s es amarrado con una cu a apropiada Cuando se usan juntos los dos componentes completan una configuraci n interna en la cual son apretados cuando una carga es aplicada a la conexi n Se deben de tomar precauciones para asegurar que la cu a no est volteada en el casquillo Puede resultar en un rendimiento de sujeci n disminuido o ruptura Cuando se hace correctamente la instalaci n y acortamientos se puede realizar r pidamente y eficazmente Cada casquillo acufiado de Brugg consiste de un casquillo una vara una 2 tuercas 1 arandela 1 clavija y 2 pinzas de sujeci n Los casquillos acufiados de Brugg son probados con 8 x19 altatraccion cable de acero y sobrepasan ASME A17 1 Regla 2 20 9 y todas las normas que se apliquen ESPECIFICACIONES DE LOS COMPONENTES Casgulllo Acero forjado 27 Gado 60 30 estr s rdevado Acero Enrollado o

In This Section - Motion Control Engineering, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents